Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Seminary Bulletin"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/princetonsemina1931prin_0 


THE 

PRINCETON 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


VOLUME  XIX  NUMBER  3 NEW  SERIES  1998 


Commencement  1998 

And,  Then,  There’s  Jesus  THOMAS  W.  GILLESPIE 

Crossing  Over,  Pressing  On  A.  K.  M.  ADAM 

Wicam  Lecture 

The  Gift  of  Consciousness  ANN  BELFORD  ULANOV 

Thompson  Lecture 

Reflections  on  Worship  in  the  Gospel  of  John  MARIANNE  MEYE  THOMPSON 

Faith  and  Identity  in  Nisei  Self-Narratives  PETER  YUICHI  CLARK 

Book  Reviews 


Index  Vol.  XIX  (1998) 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Thomas  W.  Gillespie,  President 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 


Robert  M.  Adams,  Chair 

Ralph  M.  Wyman,  Vice 

Louise  Upchurch  Lawson,  Secretary 

Clarence  B.  Ammons 

Justin  M.  Johnson 

Fred  R.  Anderson 

Thomas  R.  Johnson 

M.  Craig  Barnes 

Curtis  A.  Jones 

Robert  W.  Bohl 

Todd  B.  Jones 

William  G.  Carter 

Johannes  R.  Krahmer 

Warren  D.  Chinn 

Henry  Luce  III 

Stewart  B.  Clifford 

David  M.  Mace 

Gary  O.  Dennis 

Kari  Turner  McClellan 

John  H.  Donelik 

Julie  E.  Neraas 

Peter  E.  B.  Erdman 

Young  Pai 

Thomas  A.  Erickson 

Earl  F.  Palmer 

Rosemary  Hall  Evans 

Thomas  J.  Rosser 

Mary  Lee  Fitzgerald 

Arthur  F.  Sueltz 

JohnT.  Galloway,  Jr. 

Thomas  K.  Tewell 

Francisco  O.  Garcia-Treto 

Virginia  J.  Thornburgh 

C.  Thomas  Hilton 

Jay  Vawter 

David  H.  Hughes 

George  B.  Wirth 

Jane  G.  Irwin 

Jane  C.  Wright 

F.  Martin  Johnson 

TRUSTEES  EMERITI  /AE 

Frederick  E.  Christian 

William  H.  Scheide 

Sarah  B.  Gambrell 

Laird  H.  Simons,  Jr. 

Margaret  W.  Harmon 

John  M.  Templeton 

Bryant  M.  Kirkland 

William  P.  Thompson 

Raymond  I.  Lindquist 

Samuel  G.  Warr 

George  T.  Piercy 

David  B.  Watermulder 

THE 

PRINCETON 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


VOLUME  XIX  NUMBER  3 


NEW  SERIES  1998 


James  F.  Kay,  EDITOR 

Daniel  L.  Migliore,  BOOK  REVIEW  EDITOR 

Rolf  A.  Jacobson,  ASSOCIATE  EDITOR 


CONTENTS 


Commencement,  1998 


And,  Then,  There’s  Jesus 

Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

233 

Crossing  Over,  Pressing  On 

A.  K.  M.  Adam 

236 

Wicam  Lecture 

The  Gift  of  Consciousness 

Ann  Bel  ford  Ulanov 

242 

Thompson  Lecture 
Reflections  on  Worship  in  the  Gospel 
of  John 

Marianne  Meye  Thotnpson 

259 

Faith  and  Identity  in  Nisei  Self-Narratives 

Peter  Yuichi  Clark 

279 

Book  Reviews 

By  the  Renewing  of  Your  Minds: 

The  Pastoral  Function  of  Christian  Doctrine, 
by  Ellen  T.  Charry 

William  S.  Babcock 

2 94 

Essays  in  Postfoundationalist  Theology, 
by  J.  Wentzel  van  Huyssteen 

Roger  Trigg 

295 

First  and  Second  Thessalonians, 
by  Beverly  Roberts  Gaventa 

Calvin  J.  Roetzel 

297 

For  Our  Salvation,  by  Geoffrey  Wainwright 

Leanne  Van  Dyk 

2 99 

ii  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

The  Parables  of  Jesus:  Recovering  the  Art  of  Listening, 

by  Richard  Q.  Ford  Donald  Capps 

An  Introduction  to  Pastoral  Care,  by  Charles  V.  Gerkin  James  N.  Lapsley 

Victims  and  Sinners: 

Spiritual  Roots  of  Addiction  and  Recovery, 

by  Linda  A.  Mercadante  Elizabeth  Brishcar 

Word  without  End:  The  Old  Testament  as  Abiding 

Theological  Witness,  by  Christopher  R.  Seitz  Ralph  IV.  Klein 

The  Book  that  James  Wrote,  by  Earl  F.  Palmer  Alyce  M.  McKenzie 

Crisis  in  the  Church:  The  Plight  of  Theological 

Education,  by  John  H.  Leith  James  E.  Loder 

Clergy  Killers:  Guidance  for  Pastors  and  Congregations 

under  Attack,  by  G.  Lloyd  Rediger  David  W.  Augsburger 


Sharing  the  Word: 

Preaching  in  the  Roundtable  Church, 

by  Lucy  Atkinson  Rose  David  J.  Lose 

Teaming  Up:  Shared  Leadership  in  Youth  Ministry,  by 

Ginny  Ward  Holderness  and  Robert  S.  Hay  Kenda  Creasy  Dean 


The  Christian  Coalition:  Dreams  of  Restoration, 

Demands  for  Recognition,  by  Justin  Watson  Peggy  L.  Shriver 

The  Interim  Pastor’s  Manual,  rev.  ed.  by  Alan  G.  Gripe  Ronald  T.  Allin 


Religion,  Society,  and  Psychoanalysis: 

Readings  in  Contemporary  Theory, 

ed.  Janet  Liebman  Jacobs  and  Donald  Capps  Leland  E.  Elhard 

Showing  How:  The  Act  of  Teaching,  by  Gabriel  Moran  Freda  A.  Gardner 

Just  As  I Am:  The  Autobiography  of  Billy  Graham, 

by  Billy  Graham  Donald  Macleod 


300 

3°3 


3°5 


306 

308 


3°9 


312 


3J3 


3l6 


3i7 

V9 


321 

322 


324 


Jumping  Skyward,  by  Stan  Tate 


William  0.  Harris 


325 


CONTENTS 


iii 


Reminiscences  of  an  Octogenarian, 

by  Bruce  Manning  Metzger  James  I.  Cook  326 

Index  Vol.  XIX  (1998)  329 


The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  is  published  three  times  annually  by  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary,  Princeton,  New  Jersey. 

Each  issue  is  mailed  free  of  charge  to  all  alumni/ae  and,  by  agreement,  to  various  insti- 
tutions. Back  issues  are  not  available. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  James  F.  Kay,  Editor,  The  Princeton  Seminary 
Bulletin , P.O.  Box  821,  Princeton,  NJ  08542-0803;  email:  seminary.bulletin@ptsem.edu. 

The  Bulletin  publishes  lectures  and  sermons  by  Princeton  Seminary  faculty  and  adminis- 
tration, and  presentations  by  guests  on  the  Seminary  campus.  Therefore,  we  do  not  accept 
unsolicited  material. 


And,  Then, 

There’s  Jesus 

by  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

Farewell  Remarks  to  the  Class  of  1998  by  the  President 
of  the  Seminary 

IT  WAS  THE  SUMMER  of  1996.  James  Andrews  had  just  retired  from  his 
position  as  Stated  Clerk  of  the  General  Assembly,  the  chief  administrative 
office  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  (U.S.A.),  and  we  were  having  lunch 
together  at  the  Springdale  Golf  Club  across  College  Road  from  the  Seminary. 
Our  conversation  turned  naturally  to  the  issues  that  threaten  to  divide  our 
denomination,  as  well  as  to  the  continuing  membership  decline  that  threatens 
to  extinguish  it.  “Jim,”  I asked  at  one  point,  “do  you  see  any  hope  for  this  old 
church  of  ours?”  His  answer  was  memorable.  “No,”  he  said  flatly.  But,  with  a 
twinkle  in  his  eye,  he  added,  “And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 

That  is  the  message  of  assurance  I pass  on  to  you  this  morning  upon  your 
graduation  from  Princeton  Theological  Seminary.  Those  of  you  who  will 
now  enter  into  or  return  to  the  practice  of  ministry7  will  serve  an  institution 
that  has  been  marginalized  in  American  society. 

“And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 

Sociologists  of  religion  tell  us  that  the  American  churches  have  entered  into 
a time  of  cultural  exile. 

“And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 

Pundits  predict  that  many  mainline  churches  will  split  under  the  pressures 
of  our  irresolvable  “culture  wars.” 

“And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 

Those  of  you  who  will  now  prepare  for  or  enter  into  teaching  careers  will 
do  so  in  an  intellectual  ethos  where  there  is  no  room  for  “truth  with  a big  T 
and  in  the  singular,”  as  William  James  put  it,  and  where  there  is  only  deep 
suspicion  of  all  meta-narratives  such  as  Christians  are  compelled  by  the  gospel 
to  tell. 

“And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 

This  proviso,  which  qualifies  the  powerful  cultural  currents  that  carry  the 
Christian  Church  now  in  one  direction  and  then  in  another,  is  more  than  an 
expression  of  ungrounded  piety.  It  is  a reminder  that  we  confess  and  trust  One 
who  transcends  the  categories  imposed  upon  him  by  the  Jesus  Seminar.  No 
Jewish  version  of  a wandering  Cynic  philosopher  could  ever  trump  the 


234 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


principalities  and  powers  of  this  world.  Only  the  risen  Jesus  Christ,  the  One 
who  in  his  exaltation  has  been  given  the  Name  that  is  above  every  name,  can 
and  does  do  that.  It  was  to  the  Lord  of  history  that  Jim  Andrews  appealed 
when  he  qualified  his  hopelessness  about  the  future  of  our  church  by  adding, 
“And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 

The  reality  to  which  this  proviso  attests  is  expressed  in  such  secular 
proverbs  as:  “Life  is  what  happens  to  you  while  you  are  making  other  plans,” 
or  “History  is  made  behind  our  backs.”  A case  in  point  is  the  fall  of  the  Berlin 
Wall  on  November  9,  1989.  Who  among  us  believed  that  the  Iron  Curtain 
would  come  down  in  our  lifetime  or  that  the  Soviet  Union  would  be 
dissolved?  The  point  is  that  there  are  forces  and  powers  at  work  in  human 
history  that  override  not  only  our  individual  hopes  and  dreams  but  our 
cultural  trends  and  political  achievements  as  well.  But  “in,  with,  and  under” 
these  forces  and  powers,  to  borrow  Luther’s  prepositions,  is  the  working  of 
the  living  God  towards  those  ends  that  we  see  revealed  in  Jesus  Christ. 

The  name  given  in  scripture  to  this  dynamic  presence  of  God  among  us  is 
the  Holy  Spirit  or  the  Spirit  of  God  or  the  Spirit  of  Christ.  It  is  this  Spirit  who 
enlivens  the  church,  illumines  the  church,  and  empowers  the  church.  And 
what  is  true  of  the  church  as  a whole  is  equally  true  of  its  ministers. 

Let  me  remind  those  of  you  who  will  soon  be  ordained  that  a seminary  can 
qualify  you  academically  for  ministry  and  the  church  can  authorize  you  for 
ministry,  but  only  the  Spirit  of  God  can  empower  you  in  ministry. 

When  ministers  and  elders  lay  their  hands  upon  you  in  the  prayer  of 
ordination,  that  is  not  an  act  whereby  those  who  have  authority  and  power 
transfer  some  of  it  to  you.  The  laying  on  of  hands  is  a symbolic  act,  as  Calvin 
put  it,  whereby  the  church  receives  the  gift  God  gives  in  the  person  of  the 
ordinand.  And  in  that  act,  the  church  prays  that  God  will  empower  this  new 
minister  with  grace  sufficient  for  the  demands  of  the  ministry  now  under- 
taken. For  this  reason,  Calvin  dares  to  call  ordination  a sacrament,  meaning  an 
outward  promise  of  an  inward  grace. 

Luke’s  second  volume  in  the  New  Testament  provides  canonical  approval 
of  this  understanding.  We  call  it  “The  Acts  of  the  Apostles,”  but  a more 
appropriate  title  would  be  “The  Acts  of  the  Spirit  through  the  Apostles.” 
Recall  how  Luke  begins  the  sequel  to  his  Gospel:  “In  the  first  book,  O 
Theophilus,  I have  dealt  with  all  that  Jesus  began  to  do  and  teach.  . .”  (Acts 
1:1).  My  inference  is  that  what  “Jesus  began  to  do  and  teach”  in  the  days  of  his 
earthly  ministry,  he  now  continues  to  do  by  the  presence  and  power  of  his 
Spirit  in  and  through  the  church.  It  is  that  presence  and  power,  I believe, 
which  gives  credence  to  Jim  Andrews’  proviso,  “And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 


235 


AND,  THEN,  THERE'S  JESUS 

This  dependence  upon  and  confidence  in  God’s  Spirit  characterizes  the 
servants  of  God  in  both  Testaments.  Elisha  pleads  with  Elijah  that  he  be 
granted  a double  portion  of  the  Spirit  that  empowered  his  master,  in  order  to 
take  up  the  mantel  of  prophetic  ministry  (2  Kings  2:9).  Elisha  was  no  dummy. 
He  recognized  that  the  task  of  speaking  for  God  required  more,  infinitely 
more,  than  he  himself  had  to  offer. 

That  was  a lesson  the  apostles  learned  also.  And  out  of  that  experience  and 
wisdom  came  this  assurance  as  Paul  passed  his  mantle  to  Timothy,  “God  did 
not  give  us  a spirit  of  timidity  but  a spirit  of  power  and  love  and  self-control” 
(2  Tim.  1:7).  The  question  of  whether  the  reference  here  is  to  the  human  or  to 
the  Holy  Spirit  is  moot.  It  is  the  Holy  Spirit  who  empowers  the  human  spirit. 
It  is  the  Holy  Spirit  who  sheds  God’s  love  abroad  in  our  hearts  and  thus 
enables  us  to  love  (Rom.  5.5).  And  it  is  the  Holy  Spirit  who  exercises  sound 
judgment  and  discipline  in  relating  to  us  and  thus  teaches  us  self-control. 

This  then  is  the  assurance  I give  to  you,  the  Class  of  1998,  as  you  go  forth 
now  from  this  chapel  to  take  up  the  work  to  which  God  has  called  you.  No 
matter  what  happens  in  the  coming  days  and  years,  whether  “behind  your 
back”  or  “while  you  are  making  other  plans,”  always  remember  this  marvel- 
ous proviso,  “And,  then,  there’s  Jesus.” 


A.  K.  M.  Adam , Assistant  Professor  of 
New  Testament  at  Princeton  Theological 
Seminary,  preached  this  sermon  at  the 
Seminaiy's  Baccalaureate  Service,  held  at 
Nassau  Presbyterian  Church  on  May  17, 
i998. 

When  the  people  set  out  from  their  tents  to  cross  over  the  Jordan,  the  priests 
bearing  the  ark  of  the  covenant  were  in  front  of  the  people.  Now  the  Jordan 
overflows  all  its  banks  throughout  the  time  of  harvest.  So  when  those  who  bore  the 
ark  had  come  to  the  Jordan,  and  the  feet  of  the  priests  bearing  the  ark  were  dipped 
in  the  edge  of  the  water,  the  waters  flowing  fro??/  above  stood  still,  rising  up  in  a 
single  heap  far  off  at  Adam,  the  city  that  is  beside  Zarethan,  while  those  flowing 
toward  the  sea  of  the  Arabah , the  Dead  Sea,  weir  wholly  cut  off.  Then  the  people 
crossed  over  opposite  Jericho.  While  all  Israel  were  crossing  over  on  dry  ground,  the 
priests  who  bore  the  ark  of  the  covenant  of  the  LORD  stood  on  diy  ground  in  the 
middle  of  the  Jordan,  until  the  entire  nation  finished  crossing  over  the  Jordan. 

When  the  entire  nation  had  finished  crossing  over  the  Jordan,  the  LORD  said  to 
Joshua:  “ Select  twelve  men  from  the  people,  one  from  each  tribe,  and  command 
them,  ‘ Take  twelve  stones  from  here  out  of  the  middle  of  the  Jordan,  from  the  place 
where  the  priests'  feet  stood,  cany  them  over  with  you,  and  lay  them  down  in  the 
place  where  you  camp  tonight.  ' ” Then  Joshua  summoned  the  twelve  men  from  the 
Israelites,  whom  he  had  appointed,  one  from  each  tribe.  Joshua  said  to  them,  uPass 
on  before  the  ark  of  the  LORD  your  God  into  the  middle  of  the  Jordan,  and  each  of 
you  take  up  a stone  on  his  shoulder,  one  for  each  of  the  tribes  of  the  Israelites,  so  that 
this  may  be  a sigi  among  you.  When  your  children  ask  in  time  to  come,  ‘ What  do 
those  stones  mean  to  you?'  then  you  shall  tell  them  that  the  waters  of  the  Jordan 
were  cut  off  in  front  of  the  ark  of  the  covenant  of  the  LORD.  When  it  crossed  over 
the  Jordan,  the  waters  of  the  Jordan  were  cut  off.  So  these  stones  shall  be  to  the 
Isi'aelites  a memorial  forever. " (Joshua  3:14-4:7) 

From  what  I’ve  heard,  some  mornings  you  feel  as  though  it  has  taken  forty 
long  years  to  arrive  at  this  meeting-place.  Some  of  you  will  have 
calculated  how  many  quizzes,  how  many  exams,  how  many  papers,  how  many 
pages  of  readings  you  have  waded  through.  You  may  be  looking  back  on  long 
wearisome  walks  through  scorching  heat  and  heavy  snow,  wide  rivers  of  rainy 
days  flowing  passed,  mornings  when  you’ve  woken  up,  when  you  could  only 
feel  what  a long,  hard  forty-year  forced  march  it’s  been— especially  since  you 
know,  you  know  in  your  heart  and  your  bones  and  your  flesh,  that  you’ve 
practically  reached  your  goal.  You  can  see  some  folks  up  ahead  who  are 
already  scrambling  up  the  riverbank,  and  you  can  just  about  tell  that  Jordan 


Crossing  Over, 
Pressing  On 

by  A.  K.  M.  Adam 


CROSSING  OVER,  PRESSING  ON 


237 


River  good-bye;  get  away,  Jordan  River,  you’re  climbing  up  into  Canaan  land, 
into  the  Land  of  Promise,  and  make  that  a double  shot  of  milk  and  honey.  It’s 
been  three  years,  but  your  feet  tell  you  that  you  started  a lifetime  ago.  It’s  even 
been  less  than  three  years,  but  in  just  a matter  of  hours  President  Gillespie  will 
hand  you  a scroll  that  says,  “Well  done,  good  and  faithful  servant;  enter  into 
the  joy  of  your  Lord.”  Now  the  wilderness  is  behind  you;  the  waters  of  the 
Jordan  are  lapping  at  the  feet  of  those  Ark-carrying  priests.  As  soon  as  Joshua 
stops  talking,  we  can  collect  our  degrees,  let  the  U-Hauls  roll,  and  begin  to 
settle  in  and  scope  out  our  first  ministry  placements.  It’s  time  to  get  to  work. 

So  go  then,  my  friends,  with  our  blessings.  M.Div.  seniors,  go  out  and  set 
your  hands  to  the  vocations  for  which  you’ve  been  preparing  these  many 
months.  Th.M.  students,  go  out  fortified  now  with  a second  portion  of 
Princeton’s  academic  endowments.  Ph.D.  students,  I don’t  need  to  urge  you 
to  get  out— you’re  already  halfway  through  the  door.  Doctors  of  Ministry, 
Masters  of  Arts  in  Christian  Education,  all  our  degree  recipients,  go  out  from 
here  in  the  power  of  the  Spirit  to  spread  the  clear  light  of  the  truth  that  we’re 
all  pursuing  through  the  confusions  and  gloom  of  a heedless  world.  Col- 
leagues—Vice  President  Cassell,  Dean  Nicholson,  Professor  Douglass,  Pro- 
fessor Willis,  Dr.  Irvine,  and  especially  my  friends  Dr.  Whitaker  and  Dr. 
Edwards— go  from  here  to  relish  the  rest  promised  to  all  those  who  long  have 
toiled  in  this  beautiful  vineyard.  All,  go  from  here  strengthened  by  everything 
we  have  learned  together,  encouraged  by  the  love  and  the  respect  that  hold  us 
together.  You  are  disciples  indeed,  who  have  been  trained  for  the  kingdom  of 
heaven;  go  out  and  offer  our  world  things  old  and  things  new  from  the 
treasures  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  has  put  at  your  disposal.  It’s  time 
to  travel  light,  trusting  that  every  good  thing  you  give  away  will  be  replen- 
ished many  times  over;  it’s  time  to  put  those  treasures  to  work  on  behalf  of  the 
people  of  God. 

I pray  that  among  the  treasures  you’re  carrying  with  you,  gifts  that  we  may 
have  helped  you  to  understand  and  appreciate,  among  all  the  virtues  we 
nurtured  and  refined,  among  all  of  these,  you  know  where  to  find  hope. 
Believe  me  — from  this  day  forward,  you  will  have  no  more  precious,  more 
powerful,  and  possibly  no  more  fragile  treasure.  I mean  real,  theological  hope, 
not  just  “optimism”  or  “positive  thinking”;  I’m  talking  about  the  kind  of  hope 
that  sets  as  its  goal  the  things  not  seen,  the  kind  of  hope  that  gives  us  the 
strength  to  wait  with  patience  while  we  persist  in  building  up  God’s  people, 
while  we  strive  to  make  a way  for  God’s  way. 

Begin  your  new  ministries  with  the  well-schooled  insight  and  lengthy 
bibliography,  with  lively  inspiration,  strong  with  the  strength  that  we’ve  built 


238 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


up  over  this  long  wandering  together.  You  know  what’s  correct  doctrine,  you 
know  how  to  parse,  you  know  all  the  right  counseling  moves,  and  I’ve  heard 
you  preach.  Take  with  you  these  durable  gifts,  thanks  be  to  God,  but  don’t 
hang  on  to  them  so  tightly  that  your  grasp  on  hope  falters,  trembles, 
equivocates.  When  the  exhilaration  of  beginning  ministry  encounters  the 
intractable  forces  of  turf  conflict,  institutional  habit,  and  temperamental 
colleagues,  then  too  easily  the  confident  trust  we  started  to  learn  here 
stretches  and  thins  and  frays. 

When  theological  hope  faces  the  challenge  of  everyday  life,  the  most 
obvious  thing  for  us  to  do  is  to  ratchet  it  down  to  a more  realistic  level.  That’s 
the  maneuver  we  learn  from  friends  and  advisers  who  have  our  best  interests 
in  mind;  they  warn  us  that  hope  is  dangerous,  because  it  may  dissolve  into 
fantasy,  because  our  bosses  have  so  often  sweet-talked  us  with  a pie  in  the  sky 
instead  of  down-to-earth  help  and  consolation.  Hope,  twisted  and  tugged  in 
every  direction,  flickers  under  the  stress  of  a thousand  daily  demands  and 
pressures.  Hope  seems  so  weak,  it  looks  so  empty,  that  feet-on-the-ground 
thinking  pressures  us  to  do  some  concrete  planning  instead.  Now,  we  have  to 
plan,  it’s  responsible  and  even  necessary,  but  it’s  also  seductive.  Plans  can 
tempt  us  to  think  that  we  control  circumstances,  that  we  have  the  power  to 
establish  design  specifications  for  our  world.  Our  plans  threaten  to  become 
our  idols,  to  which  we  sacrifice  time,  money,  relationships,  our  integrity  itself, 
even  our  faith.  We  risk  displacing  our  hope  in  a misguided  exchange  for 
agendas  and  timelines. 

That’s  a bad  deal,  sisters  and  brothers;  what  a sad  loss  that  would  be!  How 
else  did  you  endure  those  long  hours  of  preparation  for  Hebrew  quizzes?  How 
else  did  you  survive  a year  of  GMioo?  What  carried  you  through  CPE? 
Through  all-nighters  and  exam  periods,  through  junior  orientation  and 
long-winded  baccalaureate  addresses,  how  came  you  here  today  if  not  by 
walking  in  hope? 

Hope  leads  us  out  through  the  wilderness.  Hope  is  our  pillar  of  cloud  by 
day,  our  pillar  of  fire  by  night,  whereas  our  plans  are  nothing  more  than  a 
hand-drawn  road  map  with  an  uncertain  itinerary.  Hope  draws  us  beyond 
what  we  know,  what  we  expect,  beyond  what  we  can  ask  or  imagine,  when 
plans  tangle  us  in  the  snarls  of  everydayness.  Hope  brought  us  out  of  exile, 
through  deprivation,  beyond  oppression,  home  to  grace.  Hope  fed  us  with 
quail  and  manna,  hope  gave  us  living  water  from  the  desert  rock,  hope 
whispered  to  us  that  strong  topic  for  our  dogmatics  paper,  hope  kept  our 
study  group  together  in  CHioi,  hope  brought  us  up  to,  over,  through  the 
Jordan  River  right  to  where  we  stand  this  afternoon.  Hope  kept  us  close  by  the 


CROSSING  OVER,  PRESSING  ON 


239 


feet  of  the  priests  so  we  could  cross  on  dry  ground,  hope  picked  us  up  and 
dusted  us  off  when  some  anonymous  clown  pushed  us  aside  into  the  mud. 
But— when  we  get  out  into  our  lives  as  ministers,  we  may  not  want  to  trust 
God  with  our  hope;  we  may  want  a king,  like  the  other  nations.  Hope  can 
seem  so  impractical,  and,  after  all,  the  congregation  just  started  a five-year 
capital  campaign  for  construction  of  a new  education  building. 

Yet  we’re  going  to  need  hope,  my  friends,  because  once  you  clamber  up 
onto  the  riverbank  beside  the  stones  of  witness,  you  are  going  to  encounter 
the  temptation  to  trade  in  your  hope  for  a mere  king;  you’ll  feel  that  urge  once 
you  get  your  boxes  off  the  Hertz  rent-a-camel  and  get  your  books  and  clothes 
unpacked.  You’re  going  to  climb  up  into  your  new  pulpit,  or  your  new  lecture 
podium,  or  even  into  your  comfy  chair  by  the  window,  and  when  you  look  out 
from  that  exciting  new  vantage  point  you’re  going  to  gaze  away  to  survey  the 
prospects  of  exciting  new  fields  for  your  ministry,  and  what  you’ll  see  . . . 
beyond  this  little  meadow,  running  along  that  line  of  trees  ...  is  another  river! 
There’s  another  blamed  river  in  the  future,  and  now  that  you’re  looking,  you 
can  see  another  river  beyond  that!  We’ve  got  many  rivers  ahead  of  us,  and  over 
the  long  haul,  most  of  us  aren’t  going  to  enjoy  more  than  an  occasional  respite 
between  rivers;  often  we  will  find  that  as  we  get  further  down  the  road,  the 
rivers  get  colder  and  swifter  and  wider. 

It  feels  like  it’s  just  not  fair.  Why  did  we  spend  those  years  in  the  wilderness 
if  it  wasn’t  to  come  to  fair  plains,  fruited  orchards,  sunshine,  and  relaxation? 
We  just  crossed  the  Jordan  to  come  into  what  we’ve  been  promised.  We 
stayed  fast  to  the  path  when  we  were  tripped  up.  We  held  fast  to  the  promises 
when  our  brothers  and  sisters  told  us  we  didn’t  belong.  We  kept  pressing  on 
when  the  leaders  of  the  nations  attacked  us.  We  stuck  with  our  calling  when  it 
seemed  like  the  waters  were  cheating  around  the  feet  of  the  priests,  just  to  give 
us  a chill.  We  spent  hard  years  pressing  on  for  the  upward  call,  and  when 
we’ve  finally  made  some  progress,  reached  a landmark,  a turning  point,  we  see 
more  wandering,  more  rivers,  more  of  the  same  and  not  an  end  after  all. 

This  is  a good  time  to  remember  your  years  in  seminary  which,  by  the  time 
you’ve  crossed  a few  more  rivers,  will  probably  look  in  retrospect  like  a May 
picnic  catered  by  Amy  Ehlin  and  her  wonderful  Aramark  team,  the  cucumbers 
and  melons,  the  leeks,  the  onions,  and  the  garlic  (well,  cucumbers  and  melons 
anyway!).  In  retrospect,  you  may  grumble,  “Why  did  you  call  us  to  this 
ministry,  when  we  could  have  stayed  and  had  a few  more  bowls  of  soup,  eaten 
a few  more  doughnuts,  written  a few  more  term  papers  with  our  friends  in  the 
oh  study  group  back  in  seminary?” 

I have  no  word  from  the  Lord  for  moments  such  as  this,  but  I venture  to 


240 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


give  my  opinion  as  one  who,  by  the  Lord’s  mercy,  may  be  trustworthy.  The 
reason  we  have  to  keep  going  out,  the  reason  we  always  have  one  more  river  to 
cross,  is  that  the  good  things  we  have  built  up  together  here  are  not  a shrine  to 
be  venerated  in  immobile  adoration,  but  are  more  like  strong,  sturdy  tools  to 
be  used  on  behalf  of  a world  that  is  still  too  much  caught  up  in  idle 
speculation,  in  self-gratifying  indulgence,  in  individualistic  rights,  in  license 
and  exploitation,  at  the  expense  of  earnest,  hardworking  folks  who— just  as  we 
climb  up  on  the  riverbank— are  themselves  being  swept  up  in  the  turbulent 
flow  of  the  surging  river.  We  have  been  built  together  into  a house  of  hope,  a 
house  not  built  with  human  hands.  We  have  been  built  together  into  a house 
whose  foundation  rests  not  in  your  first  ministry  call  or  your  fourth  or  fifth, 
not  in  the  green  valleys  of  high-steeple  congregations  nor  in  the  gloom  of  a 
squalid  soup-kitchen  (though  soup  kitchens  are  liable  to  be  closer  than  some 
high  steeples);  we  have  been  built  together  into  this  house  of  hope  to  shelter 
and  protect  one  another  and  our  neighbors  as  well,  and  the  foundation  of  this 
house  rests  by  the  side  of  an  altogether  different  river,  fed  by  the  fountain  of 
the  water  of  life.  This  river  of  life  is  for  nourishing  and  healing,  not  for 
crossing;  its  streams  make  glad  the  city  of  God,  and  they  water  our  house  of 
hope,  where  we  behold  the  Lamb,  our  Lord.  That  river  and  that  house  are 
beyond  the  horizon  for  us  now;  we  cannot  see  them  yet,  except  by  exercising 
the  kind  of  hope  that  we  learn  from  living  faithfully  with  one  another. 

And  here  I offer  you  my  understanding  of  the  secret  rationale  for  seminary 
life:  for  the  past  three  years  we  have  been  teaching  you  not  simply,  not  even 
mostly , the  names,  dates,  sources,  terms,  and  techniques  that  mark  you  as  a 
credentialed  practitioner  of  Christian  ministry.  What  seminary  life  is  about  is 
learning  a way  to  live  every  day,  every  challenge,  every  river  crossing  and 
every  pressing-on  for  the  upward  call,  in  the  enveloping  presence  of  the  Lord 
our  God.  That’s  something  we  can’t  teach  you  one  by  one,  on  your  own  — 
we’re  not  sending  210  Lone  Rangers  out  there  — but  we  teach  you  together , so 
that  by  now  you  know  that  we  all  are  part  of  one  another’s  hope:  the 
classmates  and  teachers  that  you  liked,  as  well  as  the  classmates  and  teachers 
who  frustrated  and  annoyed  you.  We  are  part  of  your  hope  (and  you  a part  of 
ours),  and  in  God’s  distinctively  wry  providential  wisdom,  some  of  us  whom 
you  are  relieved  to  escape  today  may  turn  out  to  have  spoken  a word  that’ll  be 
of  profound  help  at  some  future,  unexpected  moment.  We  are  sharers  in  a 
common  hope,  and  partners  in  the  obligation  to  bring  one  another  across 
every  river  as  best  we  can.  God  has  not  brought  us  this  far  to  leave  us;  and  God 
has  not  brought  us  this  far  together  to  permit  us  to  go  our  separate  ways.  We 
will  never  let  you  go  — and  we’re  counting  on  you  to  hold  on  to  us  as  well. 


CROSSING  OVER,  PRESSING  ON 


241 


Come  along,  then,  go  out  from  here;  but  do  not  leave  us  behind.  We  will  be 
with  you  in  your  study  and  in  your  social  work;  we  will  be  with  you  at 
reunions,  when  you  come  back  to  tell  us  what  we’ve  meant  to  you,  and  when 
we  remind  you  that  you  mean  a lot  to  us;  above  all,  in  the  hope  by  which  we 
orient  all  our  lives,  in  the  hope  that  sustains  us,  waking  and  sleeping,  in  the 
hope  that  leads  us  beyond  what  we  can  ask  or  imagine,  we  will  be  with  you 
under  the  tree  of  life,  built  into  a house  of  hope,  beside  the  river  of  the  water 
of  life,  bright  as  crystal,  flowing  from  the  throne  of  God  and  of  the  Lamb.  I’ll 
look  for  you  there. 

But  for  now, 

Get  away,  Jordan— we’ve  got  work  to  do  on  the  other  side. 

Get  away,  Jordan— we’re  pressing  on  to  the  upward  call  of  God  in  Christ 

Jesus. 

Get  away,  oh  my  Jordan— we’ve  got  to  cross  over  to  see  our  Lord. 


The  Gift  of 
Consciousness 

by  Ann  Belford  Ulanov 


Ann  Belford  Ulanov,  the  Christiane  Brooks 
Johnson  Professor  of  Psychiatry  and  Reli- 
gion, Union  Theological  Seminary,  New 
York,  delivered  the  Women  in  Church  and 
Ministry  Lecture  at  Princeton  Theological 
Seminary  on  March  3,  1998,  in  the  Audi- 
torium of  the  Mackay  Campus  Center. 


I.  Consciousness 


E DO  NOT  need  psychoanalysis  (depth  psychology)  to  convince  us  of  the 


necessity  and  value  of  consciousness.  It  is  a gift  we  soon  see  in  our 
newborn  children  — a spark,  a scintilla,  a waking  up  to  the  world  that  allows  us 
to  inhabit  the  world  with  our  own  creations  through  introjection  and  projec- 
tion, through  our  receptions  of  and  responses  to  what  is  given  us.  We  see  this 
spark  with  excitement  when  our  baby  first  recognizes  us,  when  a student 
suddenly  gets  a Greek  verb  structure,  when  our  scientists  crack  a problem  in 
space.  In  New  York  City  we  all  yelled  out  to  each  other,  stranger  to  stranger, 
on  the  street  that  day  when  we  first  put  a man  on  the  moon:  “We  did  it!  We 
sent  a man  to  the  moon!”  We  know  right  away  if  that  spark  dwells  in  another 
person,  or  fails  to.  One  of  our  children  would  say  when  very  young,  “There’s 
no  one  home  inside  him,”  or,  “Someone  is  home  in  him;  he  is  busy  inside.”  In 
the  sudden  recent  death  of  a close  friend,  his  three-year-old  grandson  said  at 
the  funeral,  which  in  the  Greek  Orthodox  tradition  is  with  an  open  casket, 
“He  is  there  but  not  in.” 

Such  language  reminds  us  of  the  soul,  but  consciousness  is  not  the  soul;  and 
they  cannot,  I believe,  be  equated,  thank  God.  For  if  our  soul  were  limited  to 
our  little  blip  of  consciousness,  that  blinks  off  and  on  and  frequently  gets 
invaded  by  compulsions  and  obsessions,  or  blotted  out  by  panic  and  lethargia, 
we  would  all  be  in  a very  bad  state!  Soul  is  bigger,  wider,  deeper  than 
consciousness  and  may  include  conscious  consent,  indeed,  requires  it  for  a 
steady  spiritual  life,  but  cannot  be  reduced  to  it.  Soul,  as  the  thirteenth- 
century  mystic  Hadewijch  says,  is  the  abyss  where  God  meets  us.1  Soul,  I 
would  say,  is  the  unlockable  door  in  us  through  which  God  can  barge  in  at  any 
moment,  putting  a paw  on  us,  claiming  us,  quieting  us,  summoning  us.  Psyche 
includes  those  conscious  and  unconscious  processes  than  enable  or  disable  us 


Hadewijch.  The  Complete  Works,  trans.  Columba  Hart  (New  York:  Paulist,  1980),  86. 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


243 


to  be  persons  in  touch  with  ourselves,  with  others,  with  God.  Soul  is  our 
willingness  to  be  a person  in  touch  with  others,  our  selves,  and  with  God.2 * 4 

Consciousness  develops  not  only  spontaneously  when  basic  needs  are 
met— for  food,  shelter,  rest,  cleanliness,  and  exercise  — but  also  and  princi- 
pally from  someone  else  holding  us,  handling  us  in  our  bodies,  and  presenting 
to  us  bits  and  pieces  of  the  world.?  We  get  an  ego  — the  center  of  conscious- 
ness—by  someone  else  lending  us  theirs.  To  gain  this  precious  sense  of  I-ness, 
we  need  an  other  on  whom  to  depend.  We  need  support  and  response  and 
presence  to  become  conscious.  We  depend  on  someone  to  evoke  our  self  in 
order  to  gain  a self.  That  someone  is  often  a woman,  and  always  includes 
women,  and  a womanly  part  of  men.  This  puts  the  feminine  mode  of  being 
both  at  the  start  and  finish  of  life  and  at  the  heart  of  the  gift  of  consciousness. 

All  schools  of  psychoanalysis  chart  the  growth  of  consciousness  and  the 
dependence  on  which  it  rests.  Indeed,  no  matter  which  school  of  depth 
psychology  we  consult,  they  all  reach  further  and  further  back  in  their  theories 
to  discover  the  origin  of  our  being  at  all,  the  ontological  premises  of  becoming 
a person.  Here  we  find  the  familiar  developmental  stages  of  Margaret  Mahler 
of  symbiosis,  separation,  rapprochement,  or  those  of  Melanie  Klein  of  the 
paranoid-schizoid  and  depressive  positions  which  round  out  or  fatten  up  the 
traditional  oral,  anal,  phallic,  and  genital  stages  of  Freud  and  deepen  the 
psychosocial  stages  of  Erikson’s  trust,  autonomy,  industry,  identity,  generatdv- 
ity,  and  so  on.  In  the  last  decades,  analysts  even  use  religious  language,  words 
such  as  sacred,  prayer,  faith,  gratitude,  and  mystery,  but  in  setting  forth  their 
theories  (with  the  exception  of  Freud  and  Jung),  they  almost  always  deny  the 
referent. 

Regardless  of  which  theory  we  follow,  consciousness  is  recognized  as 
supported  and  promoted  by  some  mysterious  force  including  instinctual  body 
energy,  which  we  call  the  unconscious.  We  recognise  this  energy  in  our 
animal  friends.  Jung  calls  animals  the  true  servants  of  God  because  they  do 
God’s  will;  they  follow  it  guided  by  their  instinct.-?  We  who  have  instinct  also 
have  this  mysterious  consciousness  which  allows  us  to  choose  against  instinct, 
even  to  choose  against  God,  and  thus  lose  our  animal  eye. 

Consciousness  figures  centrally  in  human  life.  We  mourn  its  loss  as  an 
immense  catastrophe  if  our  children  get  trapped  in  autism,  or  if  poverty  and 

2 Ann  Ulanov  and  Barry  Ulanov,  Religion  and  the  Unconscious  (Philadelphia:  Westminster, 
r975).  9!-92- 

? D.  W.  Winnicott,  “The  Theory  of  the  Parent-Infant  Relationship  [ i960],”  in  Matura- 
tional  Processes  and  the  Facilitating  Environment:  Studies  in  the  Theory  of  Emotional  Develop?nent 
(New  York:  International  Universities  Press,  1965),  37-55. 

4 C.  G.Jung,  Dream  Analysis  ( Princeton:  Princeton  University  Press,  1984),  37. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


244 

illness  blight  its  imaginative  flowering.  War  reduces  us  to  crude  instincts 
where  we  abandon  sympathetic  consciousness  of  others  in  the  pursuit  of 
survival.  Pain  can  knock  out  consciousness  altogether.  From  scripture,  revela- 
tion, and  the  evidence  of  mystics’  experience,  we  learn  that  our  small 
consciousness,  this  immense  yet  fragile  gift,  seems  to  figure  centrally  in  our 
response  to  God.  We  register  from  all  these  sources  that  God  summons  our 
free  response,  requires  our  mindful  obedience,  desires  our  desire  to  answer 
back,  to  contribute.  We  who  are  given  the  gift  of  consciousness  are  faced  with 
its  Giver  asking  for  the  gift  back  as  our  free,  intentional,  glad  offering. 
Somehow  our  knowing,  our  imagining,  our  answering  God’s  presence  is 
cherished  by  God.  The  Great  Commandment  sums  up  God’s  insistence  on 
desire,  telling  us  how  we  should  love:  all-out,  lavishly,  first  God,  then  self, 
then  neighbor.  One  love  pours  into  the  next,  overflowing,  like  the  great 
streams  of  heaven  cascading  down  upon  us.  Ethics  changes  from  a duty  to  an 
overflow,  pouring  out  unceasingly  from  the  source  of  reality  itself,  running 
into  our  heart,  soul,  mind  and  strength,  into  and  over,  under  and  around  our 
neighbor  and  from  our  neighbor  to  ourselves  and  back  again  to  God  in 
abundant  life. 

Hadewijch’s  vision  arrests  us  just  here,  reaching,  all  the  way  from  her 
thirteenth-century,  right  into  our  hearts  now  at  the  end  of  our  twentieth.  Her 
vision  displays  a tree  whose  roots  begin  in  heaven,  growing  downward  to 
earth.  The  branches  nearest  us  are  faith  and  hope.  An  angel  says  to  her,  “You 
climb  this  tree  from  the  beginning  to  the  end,  all  the  way  to  the  profound 
roots  of  the  incomprehensible  God! ”5  In  this  vision  of  the  spiritual  life,  which 
forms  a major  part  of  the  love  mysticism  in  the  Flemish  Beguine  tradition,  we 
climb  up  to  love  which  is  God’s  mysterious  center.  Our  soul,  which  is  a 
bottomless  abyss,  forms  a passageway  to  the  depths  of  God,  just  as  God  is  a 
passageway  for  the  liberty  of  our  soul.  In  the  abyss,  consumed  in  the  flame  of 
love,  God  beholds  us,  and  we  God.  But  only  through  conquering  love  — that  is 
loving  God,  the  first  thing  first,  with  the  whole  heart,  mind  and  strength— can 
we  be  conquered  by  Love  — that  is,  ushered  into  living  in  God.  We  must 
conquer  love,  Hadewijch  says,  so  Love  can  conquer  us. 

Our  desire  to  love  God  thus  wounds  us.  It  dislocates  all  our  other  loves, 
even  our  desire  for  a complete  religious  life,  a finished  spiritual  journey,  a 
successful  ministry.  All  these  loves  burn  up,  are  set  aside,  dislocated  like 
Jacob’s  hip,  when  Love  that  is  God  conquers  us.  If  we  are  not  so  wounded  but 
go  on  walking  upright  on  two  feet  instead  of  with  a limp  like  the  flame  of 
Jacob,  then  we  do  not  become  flame,  we  do  not  give  wray  to  love.  “For  Love  is 


5 Hadewijch,  Complete  Works , xi. 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


245 

that  burning  fire  which  devours  everything.”  “Love  shows  herself  unreserv- 
edly to  the  [one]  who  loves  . . . But  before  Love  thus  bursts  her  dikes,  and  . . . 
ravishes  [us]  out  of  [ourselves]  . . we  must  be  “one  spirit  and  one  being  with 
her  and  in  her  . . and  “offer  her  noble  service  and  the  life  of  exile  ...  in  all 
obedience.”6 

Exile  and  obedience  for  Hadewijch  mean  removing  all  obstacles  in  the  way7 
of  loving  full-out,  aggressively  conquering  all  that  stands  in  the  way  of  putting 
the  first  thing  first.  From  a psychoanalytic  point  of  view,  Hadewijch  is  a 
woman  who  uses  all  her  strength  and  all  her  eros;  no  repression  of  sex  and 
aggression  here!  She  actually  hears  a voice  that  salutes  her  as  the  “strongest  of 
all  warrioresses”  the  one  who  “conquered  everything  and  opened  the  closed 
totality  . . .”  to  know  “how  I am  God  and  man!”2  And  her  image  of  how  God 
comes  into  us  is  saturated  with  erotic  intensity:  “The  two  so  dwell  and 
penetrate  each  other  that  they  abide  in  fruition,  mouth  in  mouth,  heart  in 
heart,  body  in  body,  and  soul  in  soul,  both  one  thing  through  each  other,  but 
at  the  same  time  remain  two  different  selves.”8 

The  result  of  Hadewijch’s  conquering  love  and  being  conquered  by  Love  is 
that  she  lives  in  the  Trinity.  She  does  not  become  unconscious,  but  her 
consciousness  is  relocated,  given  back  to  its  deepest  foundation  in  the 
“fruition  of  love  . . . with  an  equal  eye  for  justice.”9  She  says  of  this  new  life,  “I 
have  integrated  all  my  diversity,  and  I have  individualized  all  my  wholeness.”10 
Thus,  she  does  not  become  whole  in  herself,  but  she  lives  with  her  whole 
heart,  mind,  and  soul  as  part  of  a greater  wholeness. 

In  psychoanalytical  language,  in  this  achievement  God  is  no  longer  only7  a 
subjective  object— alive  and  real  to  us,  but  marked  as  our  own  idiosyncratic 
image  and  not  shared  in  community  with  scripture  and  congregation.  Nor  is 
God  any  longer  only  an  objective  object— a figure  of  tradition  and  scripture 
that  we  know  about  but  with  which  we  do  not  feel  personal  intimacy  in  lively 
(worshiping)  connection.  God  surpasses  our  categories  of  subjective  and 
objective,  and  descends  beneath  our  categories  of  immanent  and  transcen- 
dent, to  blaze  forth  as  objective  subject— living,  breathing,  close,  and  yet 
beyond  all.  Hadewijch  and  those  like  her  inhabit  and  transform  Winnicott’s 
transitional  play  space:  living  not  only  from  the  center  of  the  self,  but  more, 


6 Ibid.,  60,  63. 

2 Ibid.,  xxiv. 

s Ibid.,  66. 

9 Ibid.,  84. 

10  Ibid.,  1 13. 


246 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


from  the  center  of  reality  which  Hadewijch  inhabits  and  which  inhabits  her. 
As  Hadewijch  puts  it,  “I  have  stayed  to  play  in  the  Lord’s  palace.”11 

We  are  faced  then  in  religious  tradition  with  paradox.  The  precious  gift  of 
consciousness,  the  ego  life  which  the  unconscious  seems  to  promote  as  much 
as  it  interrupts  and  revises,  builds  up  only  to  be  offered  beyond  itself,  back  to 
the  Giver.  Hadewijch’s  tree,  whose  roots  grow  down  from  heaven  to  earth, 
meets  the  other  tree  pointed  out  by  the  serpent  in  the  Eden  garden.  Adam  and 
Eve  are  addressed  first  by  God  and  then  by  the  serpent,  told  opposite 
things  — not  to  eat  of  the  tree  lest  you  die,  and  why  not  eat  for  you  will  not  die. 
Right  there,  in  the  moment  of  choice,  consciousness  flexes  its  freedom  (what 
Tillich  calls  dizziness  and  Kierkegaard  calls  dread).  We  took  the  route  of  the 
serpent,  choosing  the  know-it-all-tree,  not  the  tree  of  life,  thus  perverting  the 
serpent’s  power  to  the  uses  of  our  ego,  instead  of  using  our  ego  to  relate  to 
that  serpent  and  to  develop  the  wiliness  and  cunning  to  do  so.  As  a result,  we 
are  exiled  from  the  tree  of  life. 

We  whine  about  the  consequences  of  this  exile,  reasoning  that  God  created 
us  this  way,  and  even  created  the  serpent,  so  why  are  we  to  blame?  The  fault  is 
not  really  ours,  so  someone  else  should  pay,  thus  manifesting  the  Adam  in  all 
of  us  — that  masculinized  protesting  logic,  what  Jean-Luc  Marion  calls  the 
logic  of  evil.12  First,  we  protest  our  innocence;  then,  we  reason,  well  if  I did  do 
it,  you  made  me  do  it.  Then,  we  conclude  with  revenge  against  an  innocent 
bystander  because  someone  must  pay  for  what  we  have  suffered.  Adam  here 
represents  in  us  that  process  that  turns  against  the  other  in  blaming,  that 
denies  and  projects,  fingering  Eve  as  the  culprit.  The  Eve  in  us  speaks  our 
curiosity  and  active  interest  that  can  be  beguiled  and  that  needs  the  cunning  of 
doves  and  the  wisdom  of  that  very  serpent  to  see  and  behold,  and  not  be 
beguiled.  In  any  case,  God  answers  our  whining  in  person,  saying  in  effect, 
“Yes,  I did  create  you  this  way  and  I will  pay  the  cost,  I will  pay  the  debt,  and 
evil  stops  here.”  God’s  advent  in  Jesus  means  God  comes  personally  to  take 
the  blame  we  avoid.  Though  innocent,  Jesus  suffers  as  if  guilty,  accepting  the 
exile  of  the  cross,  not  protesting  but  consenting  to  take  on  and  into  himself  all 
the  pettiness,  raping,  pillaging,  mean-spiritedness,  the  torturing  and  grudge- 
holding, the  ignorance  and  denials  that  we  commit  and  suffer  every  day.  He 
mounts  the  cross,  which  in  the  recent  show  of  Byzantine  Art  at  the  Metropoli- 
tan Museum  in  New  York  City,  depicts  the  serpent  again,  now  as  vine, 
winding  around  the  tree,  now  as  cross. 

In  Hadewijch’s  vision,  the  roots  of  the  vine,  of  the  living  tree  grow  down 

" Ibid. 

12  Jean-Luc  Marion,  Prolegomines  a la  Charite  (Paris:  La  Difference,  1986),  17-18. 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


2 47 


from  heaven,  and  we  climb  up  into  the  fathomless  love  of  God.  Yet  the 
serpent  so  often  depicted  in  primordial  symbols  and  in  contemporary  people’s 
dreams  grows  up  from  below.  In  psychoanalytical  work,  we  climb  down  to  the 
source  beneath  and  before  the  ego,  to  the  unconscious  roots  of  the  ego’s 
problems  and  potentialities.  If  we  could  look  behind  the  tree  above  and  the 
serpent  below,  we  would  find  the  paradox  of  religious  experience:  the  roots  in 
heaven  and  the  roots  in  the  depths  join.  What  looks  opposite  is  united.  God 
the  Creator  puts  the  serpent  in  the  garden.  The  roots  of  God’s  living  tree 
meet  the  roots  of  the  serpent’s  tree  of  life.  They  are  all  one,  beckoning  us  to 
become  one,  one  in  heart,  mind,  soul,  and  strength,  loving  all-out,  lavishly,  as 
one  people  of  God,  all  of  us  made  visible  in  communion  with  each  other  here 
in  this  garden  on  earth.  The  story  that  begins  in  the  garden  ends  up  in  the  city 
where  we  no  longer  need  separate  sacred  from  profane;  we  no  longer  need 
special  temples  (Rev.  2 1:22).  God  breathes  everywhere;  all  of  human  conscious- 
ness is  permeated,  saturated,  rooted,  and  blooming  in  the  living  God. 

II.  Fear  of  the  Psyche 

With  such  good  news,  why  do  we  suffer  so  and  drive  each  other  crazy?  We 
fear  the  gift  given  us  and  still  make  the  choice  for  the  know-it-all  tree  instead 
of  the  living  one.  What  is  it  we  fear?  I have  found  within  our  religious 
tradition  a tremendous  fear  of  the  psyche.  Years  ago  I wrote  about  it  as  “The 
Christian  Fear  of  the  Psyche.”13  Yet  I know  in  my  bones,  my  old  bones  at  this 
point  having  taught  and  practiced  clinically  for  thirty-one  years,  that  there  is 
no  future  for  the  church  without  including,  consciously  including,  the  psyche. 
We  fear  the  flame  right  there  inside  us,  between  us,  and  among  us.  Even  when 
it  is  offered  us! 

A contemporary  woman  dreamed  of  being  smacked  hard  on  the  back  of  her 
head  and  spine,  like  the  blow  that  wakes  up  all  the  energy  symbolized  as  the 
Kundalini  Serpent  rising  through  the  bodily  chakras  to  blossom  into 
communion  with  the  divine.  Then,  in  the  dream,  the  woman  fell  down 
backwards  into  a well,  hanging  upside  down  by  her  left  foot.  Looking  down 
she  saw  blooming  at  the  bottom  of  the  well  a flaming  flower  shaped  like  the 
fleur-de-lis.  The  smack  and  the  falling  symbolized  to  her  the  tremendous 
effort  to  wake  up  and  get  unstuck  from  a lifelong  anxiety  and  get  connected  to 
life-giving  energy.  The  flaming  flower  astonished  her,  stopped  her,  felt  like  a 
living  thing  to  her,  given  as  a gift,  symbolizing  the  presence  of  the  holy  even  in 
a dark  pit  of  the  well,  a burgeoning  life  there  in  the  depths,  delicate  and 
feminine  as  a flower,  yet  sturdy  and  indestructible.  To  fear  the  psyche, 

13  In  Picturing  God  (Cambridge,  Mass.:  Cowley,  1986),  5-23. 


248 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


through  which  such  intimations  of  the  transcendent  are  bequeathed  to  us 
every  day,  would  be  as  if  this  dreamer  had  shunned  the  gift,  refused  the  flower, 
reduced  it  to  fancy  interpretation  or  psychic  complex.  And  did  not  take  it. 

We  fear  the  spontaneity,  the  livingness  offered  us  every  day.  Somehow,  we 
worry  that  if  we  accept  the  psyche  too  as  part  of  the  flesh  that  incarnates  God, 
it  means  we  are  replacing  God  with  the  psyche,  replacing  scripture  with 
dreams,  that  revelation  has  slipped  from  the  roots  in  heaven  to  the  roots  in  the 
unconscious.  Among  professional  learned  Christians  a deep  suspicion  is 
leveled  against  the  psyche  as  purportedly  replacing  God.  I like  Jung’s  answer 
to  that  accusation,  when  he  said,  “I  can’t  even  replace  a lost  button  with  my 
imagination  or  ideas.  How  could  I ever  replace  God?” 

I have  thought  a lot  about  this  fear  of  the  psyche  and  our  defenses  against  it, 
defenses  that  play  out  in  ignoring  the  tremendous  impact  of  depth  psychology 
on  the  interpretation  of  scripture,  the  doing  of  ethics,  the  understanding  of 
doctrine  and  symbol,  let  alone  the  practical  work  of  ministry.  It  is  not  easy  to 
admit  we  could  act  out  our  aggression  in  a preaching  style  that  bores  our 
congregations  to  death,  or  that  hectors  our  flock  to  think  a certain  way  and 
makes  them  feel  guilty.  There  is  Freud’s  death  instinct  at  work!  Freud’s  own 
wry  remark  calls  us  up  short.  He  said  he  never  found  a large  amount  of  sadism 
in  his  makeup,  so  he  did  not  have  to  devote  himself  to  serving  humanity.  This 
certainly  puts  a new  light  on  our  wish  to  serve  others!  We  indulge  a kind  of 
omnipotence  of  benevolence,  as  if  somehow,  we,  not  God,  had,  like  Diana  of 
Ephesus,  a multitude  of  breasts  that  never  ran  dry  of  milk. 

The  psyche  can  no  better  rival  God  than  can  politics,  or  our  reason,  or  our 
ethical  maxims,  or  science.  The  psyche  adds  a new  hermeneutic  to  the 
theological  enterprise  as  also  the  flesh  through  which  God  makes  manifest  the 
mysterious  doings  of  the  good  news,  of  love  in  action,  of  the  blooming  tree  of 
life.  We  are  as  vulnerable  with  the  psyche  as  we  are  with  any  other  human 
enterprise  — of  taking  the  part  for  the  whole.  Thus,  we  have  had  the  political 
God,  the  psychological  God,  the  jot-and-tittle  God,  the  God  of  rules,  the 
God  of  formulas,  the  sexually  defined  God,  the  racially  defined  God,  God  as 
dead,  red,  black,  gay,  female,  male,  psychological  force,  and  revolutionary 
activism.  But,  as  Jung  says,  God  never  defends  himself  against  our  names  for 
him. '4  God  is  merciful,  always  forgiving  us  taking  the  part  for  the  whole,  our 
god-image  for  the  living  God.  God  is  ruthless,  breaking  through  those 
images,  scattering  the  imaginations  of  our  hearts,  to  address  us  with 
immediate  holy  presence. 

'+  C.  J.  Jung,  Nietzsche's  Zarathrustra : Notes  of  the  Seminar  Given  in  1934-1939,  2 vols.,  ed. 
James  L.Jarrett  (Princeton:  Princeton  University  Press,  1988),  1:39. 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


249 


The  psyche,  then,  brings  us  to  the  frontier  with  the  holy,  as  every  other 
human  endeavor  does.  The  psyche  feels  more  momentous  because  it  is  nearer 
to  us,  and  utterly  democratic,  addressing  each  and  everyone  of  us,  cutting 
across  divisions  of  education,  class,  sexual  stance,  health  (both  mental  and 
physical),  country,  historical  epoch,  and  culture.  We  share  the  same  kind  of 
mental  life,  but  not  the  same  mental  life.  Hence,  Hadewijch’s  remarkable 
statement  from  the  thirteenth  century,  “I  have  integrated  all  my  diversity  and 
individualised  all  my  wholeness.”15  To  recognize  the  reality  of  the  psyche  is  to 
enter  into  an  additional  level  of  community,  where,  like  fellow-refugees,  we 
all  face  sex  and  aggression,  dreams  and  symptoms,  anxieties  and  potentialities, 
needs  and  contributions.  We  all  face  the  marvel  of  consciousness  and  the 
impulse  to  give  it  back  to  its  mysterious  Giver. 

Religion,  and  particularly  the  spiritual  life,  focuses  on  who  the  Giver  is, 
who  it  is  that  knocks  at  our  door,  who  has  been  hunting  us  down  the  years, 
saving  the  best  place  for  us  at  the  feast.  Religion  speaks  of  this  other  source  as 
the  source  above  and  beneath  us,  between  and  before  us,  a surrounding  that 
brings  the  vast  eternal  into  the  tiny  precious  now.  Religion  salutes  what  stands 
forth  from  the  center  of  reality  as  its  author  and  goal,  addressing  us,  calling  us 
into  communion  with  itself.  Our  task  is  how  to  live  ever  aware  of  this  as  the 
fundamental  point  of  life,  not  to  turn  away,  not  to  perjure  and  pretend  we  do 
not  know  it.  And  not  to  pretend  our  pictures  of  it  and  our  theories  about  it  can 
substitute  for  our  living  there. 

III.  Meaning 

Ricoeur  reminds  us  that  we  constantly  and  inevitably  collapse  the  horizon 
of  the  infinite  into  only  one  finite  part  that  has  mediated  the  infinite  to  us. 
The  better  the  meaning  we  fashion  and  fasten  on,  the  more  it  mediates  to  us 
the  reality  of  the  divine,  the  more  our  temptation  to  reify  it,  capture  it,  and 
possess  the  truth  through  it.  Thus,  we  come  back,  again  and  again,  to  the 
know-it-all  tree.  We  know  the  difference  between  good  and  evil!  We 
succumb  to  our  knowledge  of  the  good,  the  lure  of  its  perfume  and  heady 
power.  We  take  what  mediates  the  divine  presence  to  us  in  place  of  the  divine. 
We  read  the  map  of  the  territory  of  the  holy  instead  of  going  there,  or 
acknowledging  it  is  already  here.  Jean-Luc  Marion  says  that  is  why  Jesus 
ascends  to  heaven.16  He  must  leave  us  so  we  can  find  him  finding  us 
everywhere.  If  he  stays  here  in  specific  form,  we  substitute  that  for  the 
substance  of  his  total  presence. 

■5  Hadewijch,  Co?nplete  Works , 113. 

16  Marion,  Prolegomencs,  163  ff. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


25° 

We  are  thus  returned  to  the  paradox  of  consciousness.  How  do  we  find  and 
create  meaning  without  explaining  it  away  or  reducing  it  to  our  invention? 
How  do  we  recognize  objective  meaning,  that  we  did  not  originate,  without 
excluding  as  frivolous  (if  not  blasphemous)  our  subjective  meanings  that  feel 
so  real  to  us?  How  do  we  get  free  of  meanings  that  have  trapped  us,  so  that  we 
find  it  sinful  to  change  them,  even  though  they  no  longer  transmit  to  us  the 
presence  and  power  to  which  they  point?  Even  our  very  own  dreams  which 
arise  spontaneously  in  our  sleep  can  fall  prey  to  a fetishism  of  the  text— as  if 
they  do  not  mean  anything  or  make  any  difference  until  we  interpret  them! 
And  what  of  lost  meaning,  those  of  us  who  know  despair,  who  can  find  no  way 
through  but  only  round  and  round  in  repeated  compulsions,  suicidal 
depressions,  and  antisocial  behavior? 

The  clinical  enterprise  offers  a good  laboratory  for  these  large  human 
issues.  All  of  them  come  up  in  the  work  of  depth  analysis.  That  is  not  the  only 
place  they  turn  up,  but  it  is  a good  place  to  look  at  the  issues  of  subjective  and 
objective  meaning  and  the  paradox  of  building  up  consciousness  only  to  find  it 
relativized.  In  the  clinical  encounter,  we  face  the  problems  of  finding  a 
meaning  which  supports  and  builds  up  our  consciousness,  which  we  know  is 
objectively  there  and  we  can  count  on,  but  which  is  also  alive  and  real  to  us, 
quickening  our  spirit  and  feeding  our  blood.  Meaning  eludes  us,  nothing  feeds 
us.  We  know  all  about  meanings  that  religion  speaks  of  and  that  inhabit  our 
culture.  But  they  are  dead  to  us.  We  cannot  connect.  And  we  feel  impotent  to 
create  any  new  meaning.  And  even  if  we  could,  such  meaning  feels  like 
will-o’-the-wisp,  a cotton-candy  variety,  ready  to  vaporize  the  moment  we 
taste  it,  a false  bottom  that  drops  us  back  into  the  void  the  moment  we  lean 
our  full  weight  upon  it. 

Most  of  us  who  seek  out  analysis  feel  similarly  troubled.  Trauma  has 
trapped  us,  one  missing  part  makes  the  whole  unviable.  Either  feeling  suicidal 
or  homicidal,  out  of  control  in  eating  or  anxiety,  or  overcontrolled  so  that  the 
suffering  besetting  us  can  only  be  referred  to  in  the  vaguest  of  terms  — 
something  does  not  “feel  right,”  we  say,  or,  “I  can’t  connect.”  We  feel 
blocked,  caught  in  repetitious  plots  with  the  same  old  ending,  unable  to  break 
through  to  new  meaning  even  if  we  are  breaking  down.  Hence  the  meanings 
that  we  inherit  from  culture  and  from  religion  do  not  hold.  The  net  frays, 
breaks;  we  fear  to  plunge  endlessly,  without  rescue  or  resource.  We  know  the 
existence  of  meaning  only  negatively— it  has  abandoned  us,  delivered  us  into 
feeling  that  we  live  in  a random  world,  with  no  foothold,  no  support  for  the 
person  we  want  to  become,  with  no  one  touching  us  with  love,  wanting  us  to 
see  something  wonderful,  desiring  with  us  intense  conversation;  no  one 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


251 


wanting  to  hear  from  us  our  news  from  the  frontier  with  the  transcendent.  No 
one  wanting  to  find  out  what  we  feel  or  say  in  the  face  of  death;  we  no  longer 
can  laugh  full-out.  We  feel  bereft,  drifting,  or  falling.  We  settle  into  routines 
but  get  caught  in  repetitions  which  at  once  try  to  solve  the  problem  we  suffer, 
both  to  express  it  and  to  hide  it,  to  liberate  us  at  last  while  barring  our  way. 
Like  a fairy-tale  witch,  we  gnash  our  teeth,  live  in  isolation  where  no-thing 
grows,  a victim  of  unlived  life.1"  What  troubles  us  individually,  troubles  our 
community  too.  For  the  one  lost  sheep,  that  one  of  us,  or  that  part  in  each  of 
us— our  secret  shame,  our  unguessed  violence— that  sheep  remains  lost  unless 
we  go  out  looking  for  it,  and  we  cannot  join  with  others  until  we  find  it,  and 
others  cannot  be  a whole  community  as  long  as  this  one  is  missing. 

An  example  will  help  — stark  and  startling  to  me,  as  in  all  my  years  I had  not 
seen  such  a cutting  off  of  every  aspect  of  life  in  mid-life  as  one  man  faced.  His 
job  had  let  him  go;  dissolved  were  his  research  team,  his  space  where  he 
worked,  and  the  funding.  So  he  could  not  just  take  up  a similar  job  somewhere 
else.  His  marriage  wavered  and  entered  a space  of  separation.  The  woman 
who  tempted  him  into  a new  life  had  left  him  and  refused  to  acknowledge  that 
anything  earthshaking  had  happened  between  them.  His  creativity  abandoned 
him.  No  job,  no  mate,  no  friend,  no  funds,  no  new  on  the  horizon  to  beckon 
him.  Stalled  in  the  water.  No  dreams  even.  And  the  very  few  that  appeared 
over  months  showed  characters  who  could  not  have  cared  less  about  getting 
conscious,  growing,  facing  up  to  trouble,  etc.  He  would  dream  of  people  who 
did  not  want  to  go  on  the  trip,  who  rejected  the  conversation,  who  refused  to 
go  outside  when  someone  was  caught  in  a crime.  Consciously,  he  was  eager, 
even  desperate  to  engage  the  psyche,  to  delve  into  the  whys  and  wherefores. 
Unconsciously,  nothing,  and  what  little  appeared  put  “cancelled”  across  his 
plans.  After  six  months  of  work,  a dream  arrived  that  announced  a new  level. 
In  the  dream,  set  in  the  time  of  monarchy  and  carriages,  he  anxiously  tries  to 
reach  the  queen  through  the  crowds  to  get  something  from  her  as  she  sits  in 
her  carriage.  The  queen  puts  three  large  coins  in  his  hand,  and  he  rushes 
through  the  crowds  to  complete  his  mission:  to  give  the  coins  to  the 
executioner— a large  fat  woman  — to  chop  off  his  head.  They  discuss  the  best 
way  to  do  it  clean  and  quick  and  the  dream  ends  with  the  shwoosh  sound  of 
the  blade  severing  his  head  from  his  body. 

What  are  we  to  make  of  this  — to  cut  off  his  consciousness,  to  sever  the 
intellect  from  the  body?  Whatever  meaning  was  to  arrive,  it  would  arrive  by 
another  route,  not  his  brain.  Images  did  come  which  described  this  letting-go 

17  Ann  Ulanov  and  Barry  Ulanov,  The  Witch  and  the  Clown:  Two  Archetypes  of  Human 
Sexuality  (Wilmette,  111.:  Chiron,  1987),  chap.  2. 


252 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


activity.  He  felt  himself  to  be  “a  piece  of  seaweed  drifting  on  the  ocean.”  In 
another,  a dog  barked  as  he  entered  an  apartment,  but  he  could  make  no 
headway  understanding  what  the  dog  meant  because,  “I  don’t  speak  bark,”  he 
said.  “I’m  dying,”  he  said.  “The  core  is  melting.”  “I  can’t  be  a hyphen 
anymore  for  anyone  else’s  life.  I must  be  my  own  verb.” 

The  point  was  this:  we  constructed  meanings  which  were  subjectively  real, 
of  causes  that  led  to  his  present  affliction.  We  also  investigated  possibilities  of 
where  the  present  troubles  were  leading;  their  meaning  was  also  to  be  found 
in  what  they  assembled  to  come  toward  him  as  his  future.  His  consciousness 
grew  more  sturdy  which  helped  him  endure  “not-knowing”  how  his  marriage 
would  come  out,  his  unemployment,  his  sense  of  being  totally  cut  off  from  any 
sure  direction,  indeed,  the  whole  hiatus  that  now  defined  his  life.  He  felt 
stronger,  less  panicked,  more  open  to  what  might  be  addressing  him  in  this 
dramatic  halt  to  his  life.  Plucked  out  of  ordinary  time  of  the  daily  routine  and 
eager  to  connect  to  the  eternal  time  of  the  meaning  of  life,  his  consciousness 
of  the  whys  and  wherefores,  and  of  the  “tendings-towards”  sustained  our 
analytical  work.  But  neither  construction  of  meaning  through  creating  the 
causality  from  his  past,  nor  the  assembling  of  a future  was  enough. 

To  find  the  root  causes  in  his  ghetto  upbringing  where  nihilism  threatened 
everyday  in  terms  of  random  violence  in  his  project’s  building  elevator,  or 
from  retaliation  on  the  streets  if  even  accidentally  he  bumped  some  tough 
guy,  helped  him  face  the  nihilism  now  invading  him.  Before,  he  had  always 
been  able  to  surmount  it  through  his  brilliance  and  his  unending  hard  work. 
He  had  gotten  out  of  the  ghetto  and  into  a stimulating  life  that  brought  him 
meaning  by  a sense  of  contributing  to  the  greater  good.  But  now,  in  mid-life, 
he  found  himself  back  in  a timeless  zone  like  the  ghetto,  where  nothing 
matters  and  anything  could  happen.  He  could  disappear  under  the  waves,  and 
the  world  would  not  care;  it  would  make  no  difference. 

Nihilism,  coupled  with  relentless  violence,  was,  for  him,  the  one  lost  sheep 
that  needed  to  be  found  consciously  so  the  whole  rest  of  him  could  again 
function.  We  had  to  go  back  in  the  past  to  go  forward  into  the  future  that  was 
beckoning.  He  needed  now  not  to  surmount  the  nihilism,  but  to  see  where  it 
led  him  when  it  was  included.  It  led  to  chopping  off  his  head  — at  first. 
Another  approach,  another  vision,  was  needed. 

He  and  I could  create,  formulate,  devise  meanings  and  respond  to  the 
weavings  of  meaning  that  generated  the  analysis,  that  came  toward  us,  so  to 
speak.  We  could  ask,  why  did  all  this  happen  now?  What  was  being 
constructed,  what  plan  set  up  for  the  future?  Why  did  events  come  in  this 
form  and  not  some  other?  But  were  all  these  subjectively  real  constructions 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


253 


anymore  than  just  that;  too  flimsy  to  withstand  reality  outside  the  office, 
outside  the  sessions  we  shared?  Was  there  nothing  objective  here?  No  solid 
durable  meaning  that  we  did  not  devise,  on  which  he  could  rely?  Was  there 
some  objective  path  intended  for  him  that  he  was  groping  to  find  which  would 
convict  him  with  its  authority  and  purpose,  because  he,  and  I,  knew  that  this 
path  did  not  originate  with  us  and  that  we  did  not  invent  it?  Or,  to  speak  from 
a spiritual  perspective,  was  there  no  enduring,  objective,  given  meaning  that 
exists  outside  our  subjective  ones  that  cannot  be  turned  into  an  idol?  This 
objective  meaning  is  what  religion  stands  for,  and  work  with  the  psyche,  I 
believe,  demands  from  its  practitioners  acknowledgement  of  the  ontological 
premises  of  their  clinical  methods.  All  language  of  the  psyche  springs  from 
language  of  the  spirit,  and  psychological  work  functions  at  its  best  in 
collaboration  with  the  spirit. 

To  entertain  in  clinical  work  that  objective  meaning  exists  for  each  of  us, 
given  to  us  outside  our  own  invention  and  construction,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  receiving  the  task,  taking  it  on,  of  making  meaning,  constructing  lines  of 
causality  from  our  past  relationships  with  others  (the  object  relations  school) 
and  from  the  history  of  our  defenses  against  instinctual  conflict  (the  drive 
theory),  and  of  mapping  how  our  ego  has  built  up  consciousness  using  the 
images  provided  by  our  cultural  historical  context  (ego  psychology  and 
theories  of  cultural  conditioning),  means  living  in  the  paradox  with  which 
religious  experience  is  so  familiar.  We  must  really  become  conscious  and  do 
our  ego  work  to  make  sense  of  the  insensible,  the  unbearable.  And  we  must  at 
the  same  time  know  that  all  our  conscious  constructions  of  meaning  are 
relative  — to  our  object  relations,  to  our  experience  of  instinctual  drives,  to  our 
cultural  context,  and  to  our  ego  functions.  We  need  all  these  and  we  can  see 
through  them. 

If  we  can  tolerate  this  relativity  of  consciousness,  its  necessity  and 
preciousness  and  its  ephemeral  nature,  we  can  be  freed  from  consciousness, 
and  freed  for  consciousness  of  our  ego  as  looked  at  by  some  other  presence 
that  makes  itself  known  to  us  when  we  are  sufficiently  empty  to  make  room 
for  it.  We  see  our  consciousness  and  no  longer  identify  with  it.  We  feel  the 
roots  that  grow  down  from  heaven  and  up  from  the  serpent  tree  below.  We 
look  at  our  consciousness  instead  of  only  through  it. 

From  the  point  of  view  of  consciousness,  this  dislocation,  this  wounding  as 
with  Jacob’s  limping,  feels  like  a breakdown,  a cutting  off  of  our  head,  decreed 
by  the  queen.  From  the  point  of  view  of  the  larger  psyche  and  reality  beyond 
the  psyche,  this  breakdown  breaks  through.  We  empty  of  consciousness 
which  makes  space  to  behold  spontaneous  life  given  us,  through  the 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


2 54 

graciousness  of  our  Creator,  the  blooming  flower  surprising  us  at  the  bottom 
of  the  well.  But  we  must  be  turned  on  our  head  to  find  it.  In  religious 
language,  this  emptiness  is  submission,  a humble  letting  go  of  ourself,  a losing 
of  our  life  to  find  that  we  are  found  by  the  consciousness  of  a greater  Subject. 
Sometimes  we  experience  this  being  looked  at  by  another  presence  very 
forcefully  in  dreams.  Dreams  give  us  immediate  experience  of  paradox:  where 
we  are  both  subject  and  object,  subjects  but  also  objects  of  attention  of  a 
greater  consciousness  that  both  includes  and  transcends  us. 

A woman  in  her  sixties  dreamed,  “A  dove  all  green  in  color  had  just  come 
through  some  ordeal  and  stood  and  looked  at  me.  I made  an  impromptu 
sound  to  call  to  the  bird,  and  when  I did,  a little  twig  pushed  out  budding 
green,  the  same  color  as  the  bird.”  The  dreamer  suffered  an  enormous  ordeal 
of  physical  illness  that  stole  her  balance  and  slurred  her  voice.  The  bird 
looking  at  her  also  embodied  her  ordeal;  it  had  come  through  something  hard. 
Thus,  in  the  dream  she  was  seen  and  her  suffering  recognized;  spontaneously 
she  responded,  trying  to  make  a sound  to  speak  to  the  bird.  When  she  did,  a 
twig  barren  of  leaves,  sent  out  a green  shoot.  The  object  of  another  subject, 
her  suffering  looked  at  her  through  the  animal  eye  of  the  dove.  Being 
religious,  she  associated  the  dove  with  God’s  Spirit.  Beheld,  she  wanted  to 
behold,  to  reach  out  in  sound,  in  animal  noise  to  acknowledge  the  suffering  of 
the  creature  that  acknowledged  her  suffering.  When  she  did,  from  die  barren 
twig  a shoot  of  the  new  came  into  being. 

Such  a dream  brings  news  of  what  lives  in  us  beyond  our  egos  and  points  to 
what  spontaneously  creates  the  psyche  and  holds  it.  So  do  other  human 
events.  Not  just  dreams.  And  not  just  psychic  examples.  Falling  in  love  brings 
news  from  the  frontier  with  the  transcendent— archetypal  moments  that 
break  in  upon  us  at  funerals,  at  births,  at  moments  of  loss,  and  at  moments  of 
forgiveness  where  the  old  that  had  died  and  was  gone  returns  in  new 
form  — and  we  are  given  the  power  to  recognize  its  gathering  up  of  the 
blighted  old  suffering  and  the  delivering  of  it  into  new  living.  We  climb  up  to 
the  roots  of  the  It  that  lives  me,  not  the  I,  but  the  Christ  thrumming  through 
our  veins.  We  climb  down  to  the  It  that  lives  me,  not  the  ego,  but  the 
primordial  unconscious,  with  its  deep  structures  of  the  timeless  that  give  us 
archetypal  pictures  which  Jung  calls  “the  tools  of  God.”’8 

We  can  talk  about  psychic  structures  and  how  they  impact  upon  ego- 
consciousness  to  break  it  down  to  emptiness  so  that  we  can  receive  the 
spontaneous  gestures  of  a life  living  deeper  in  us.  We  can  talk  about  trauma 
breaking  up  our  trappedness  in  fruitless  repetitions,  breaking  us  down  to  this 

18  C.  G.Jung,  Letters,  2 vols.,  (Princeton:  Princeton  University  Press,  1975),  2:130. 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


255 


empty  place.  We  reach  an  emptiness  which  allows  awareness  of  the  other  to 
come  in,  an  other  that  steadfastly  makes  and  remakes  us,  breaks  us  apart  to 
break  through  to  us  with  its  larger  life,  its  eloquent  presence  that  comes 
through  word,  through  image,  through  fur,  through  music,  through  utter 
silence,  through  crowded  emotion,  through  play,  through  the  offering  at  a 
worship  sendee,  and  the  high  stepping  of  a rock  concert.  But  the  willingness 
to  respond,  spontaneously  to  choose  the  tree  of  life,  the  effort,  despite  losing 
our  balance  and  our  voice,  to  chirp  at  the  bird  who  sees  us,  that  response  is 
asked  of  us  and  given  to  us  to  give  back. 

IV.  Living 

To  see  this  relocation  of  consciousness  and  give  way  to  it,  we  need  a 
different  kind  of  consciousness.  At  the  end  of  the  twentieth  century,  this  kind 
of  consciousness  partakes  of  a feminine  mode  of  being,  a process  living  in  all 
of  us,  male  and  female.  We  need  to  consent,  to  go  down,  to  fall  apart,  to  be  in 
the  midst  of,  not  to  know  with  the  clarity  of  logical  progression  and  summary 
conclusion,  not  to  abstract  and  generalize  but  to  cherish  the  particular  as  a 
mother  cherishes  the  particular  child  in  her  womb.  We  need  to  ponder  in  the 
heart,  not  the  head,  and  like  Mary  take  the  sword-piercing  into  our  soul  and 
consent  to  be  the  mother  of  revolution,  the  bringer  of  the  One  who  ends  all 
religion,  all  reifications  of  infinite  into  finite.  She  delivers  into  the  world  the 
One  who  presides  over  and  obviates  all  divisions  of  gender  and  class,  of 
education  and  beauty,  of  wealth  and  intellect,  of  creed  and  ideology.  This  One 
brings  the  news  that  each  of  us  is  pondered  as  a special  child  of  God,  carried 
and  delivered  into  the  world.  This  kind  of  consciousness  ushers  us  to  the  foot 
of  the  cross  where,  with  that  gaggle  of  Marys,  we  too  are  tough  enough  to 
survive  the  stripping  of  all  our  projections  onto  God,  all  our  God-images,  and 
idols  of  the  holy,  to  behold  the  God  who  comes  and  makes  all  things  new. 
This  God  calls  us  by  our  name  as  the  risen  Jesus  called  the  Magdalene,  thus 
allowing  us  to  knit  up  the  continuity  of  the  One  who  was,  whom  we  lost,  with 
the  One  now  before  us  as  the  One  who  is,  the  “isness”  of  life  itself.  This 
unknown  we  receive  in  the  flesh,  in  the  small,  inhabiting  us  and  changing  all 
our  values. 

For  the  unfolding  of  this  arrival  is  not  a series  of  products,  like  books, 
babies,  jobs,  or  even  mental  health.  The  dreamer  of  the  green  dove  and  twig, 
discovers  through  her  own  ordeal  of  illness  that  the  resurrected  body  still 
bears  its  wounds.  We  live  in  history,  and  history  shapes  us  in  this  life.  The  new 
pushes  out  our  boundaries  and  endows  us  with  life,  but  does  not  magically 
whisk  away  all  the  costs  of  mortality.  Depth  psychological  treatment  is  not 


256 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


magic.  It  digs  out  and  digs  down  to  this  dimension  other  than  the  ego  from 
which  life  springs.  It  dislocates  and  rearranges  the  ego  to  accommodate  this 
life  if  the  soul  is  willing.  It  flows  through  us  then,  not  from  our  ideas  of  the 
good,  but  with  its  own.  It  brings  news  from  the  frontier.  It  brings  life. 

The  result  of  contacting  this  dimension,  and  opening  to  what  speaks 
through  it,  is  living,  not  products,  but  new  living,  living  in  the  new.  Analysts 
know  about  this  and  describe  it  in  their  own  vocabularies.  Winnicott  talks 
about  living  creatively  where  we  see  everything  afresh  with  enjoyable  wonder. 
Bion  reaches  toward  the  unnameable  O that  we  hope  for  as  the  truth  of  every 
session.  Freud’s  goal  of  love  and  work  breathes  the  All  into  the  mundane 
everyday.  Jung  writes  of  seeing  through  the  eyes  not  of  the  ego  but  of  the  Self, 
that  midway  region  between  psyche  and  what  transcends  it.  The  ego  serves 
the  Self  and  the  Self  serves  the  Transcendent.  Hadewijch  speaks  of  living  all 
the  concrete  humanity  of  God  in  Christ,  which  means  the  debt-paying, 
offered  for  all  others.  Many,  if  not  most,  clinical  encounters  do  not  open  into 
specific  religious  vocabulary.  But  if  they  succeed,  the  client  feels  herself  open 
to  a bigger  region;  she  feels  addressed  by  a larger  encompassing  reality  to 
which  connection  and  conversation  must  be  sustained.  The  repetitious 
compulsions  that  break  our  spirit  and  lead  us  into  analysis,  must  give  way  to 
rituals  of  acknowledgement  and  confirmation  of  that  other  presence  that  has 
come  to  the  analysand  through  his  or  her  own  unconscious.  Without  some 
ritual,  the  other  remains  anonymous  to  us.  It  needs  to  be  named  if  we  are  to  go 
on  in  relationship  with  it. 

We  need,  then  also,  in  addition  to  the  feminine  processing  of  experience  in 
the  flesh,  in  the  small,  in  the  deep  downward  inhabiting,  the  masculine 
processing  as  well,  to  name,  to  find  words  for,  to  abstract  and  communicate. 
We  need  to  stand  forth  and  relate  to  it  and  describe  its  tremendous  impact 
upon  us.  We  need  to  say  such  things  as,  yes  a specific  way,  a path  exists  for 
each  one  of  us,  objectively  there,  given;  yet  to  find  it,  we  must  create  and 
construct,  and  improvise  our  ways  to  it.  We  must  articulate  the  tension 
between  the  ego  patterns  we  impose  on  life  and  the  fact  that  they  are  relative, 
invented,  not  final,  but  without  which  we  never  find  our  final  path.  We  need 
to  speak  about  how  our  consciousness  is  structured  by  forms  outside 
consciousness  which  support  and  subvert  it  at  once,  that  in  fact  we  are  dancing 
to  a pattern  going  on  in  each  session  of  therapy  which  is  beyond  the  full 
control  or  comprehension  of  the  participants.  A living  thing,  or  presence 
inhabits  the  space  and  functions,  to  push  and  prod  and  delicately  touch  us  to 
open  to  its  arrival.  Sometimes  the  analysand  thinks  the  analyst  knows  all  about 
this  pattern.  I’ve  been  described  by  patients  as  the  cattle  prod  in  their 


THE  GIFT  OF  CONSCIOUSNESS 


257 


transference.  But  I know  front  my  side,  that  I too  am  responding  to  something 
that  is  right  there,  shaping  and  pushing  me,  flattening  me  and  punching  me 
down  like  so  much  bread  dough  to  let  the  hot  air  escape.  Only  from  the  whole 
interaction  of  subject  and  subject  does  an  objective  meaning  reveal  itself. 

If  we  hold  onto  our  ego  view,  we  refuse  the  larger  pattern  and  eventually 
split  into  polarized  versions  of  the  dance  pattern  with  its  many  conjunctions. 
Then,  we  get  the  wars  of  masculine  versus  feminine,  of  adult  versus  child,  of 
community  versus  individual,  of  theory  versus  praxis,  analyst  versus  analy- 
sand,  first  world  versus  third  world,  and  on  and  on.  We  degenerate  into  the 
know-it-all  explanations  of  power  relations.  Even  ethics  is  helper  to  helpee 
which  is  always  power-minded,  however  muted. 

We  fall  into  a polarized  differentiation  of  haves  and  have-nots,  even  with 
Winnicott,  who  helpfully  translates  the  old  dualities  into  psychological  ones. 
For  him,  the  “haves”  possess  a sense  of  self  in  a body  that  the  “have-nots” 
lack.  This  description  recommends  itself  to  us  because  it  cuts  across  the 
familiar  lines  of  class,  color,  gender,  and  wealth.  Alice  Miller  also  ably  points 
out  how  we  displace  onto  social  injustices  the  rage  and  mourning  we  defend 
against  by  idealizing  parents  whom  we  defend,  for  example,  as  “beating  me 
for  my  own  good;  it  made  me  strong.”  To  become  conscious  of  the  rage  and 
mourning  for  what  we  missed  does  not  keep  us  from  joining  causes  against 
injustice.  It  makes  us  more  effective  because  we  are  more  flexible,  no  longer 
smuggling  an  unconscious  personal  agenda  into  the  commonly  suffered 
injustice.  Wren-Lewis  finds  the  same  avoidance  as  Miller  does  when  he  traces 
economic  injustice  to  our  denial  of  the  spontaneous,  autonomous  life 
bubbling  up  in  everyone.  Only  by  seeing  this  gift  of  life  in  the  other  and  in 
ourselves  do  we  join  together  to  build  a society  that  includes  all  equally. 
Masud  Khan  says  that  when  we  deny  dream  space,  we  act  out  in  society  the 
rage  and  despair,  often  in  criminal  ways,  that  would  plot  our  nighttime 
reveries.19  Two  Jungian  analysts  who  investigated  Mezoamerican  myths  find  a 
meaning  in  the  horrifying  symptom  of  young  adults,  often  women,  cutting 
themselves  ritually.20  They  cut  their  arms  or  face  or  other  body  parts  because 
they  cannot  house  archetypal  forces,  so  they  become  obsessed  and  possessed 
by  them,  and  act  them  out  on  their  bodies.  At  the  same  time,  such  cutting  is  an 
effort  to  cut  through  conscious  numbness,  a cut-offness  from  the  psyche. 
Cutting  tries  to  cut  through,  to  make  contact.  So  like  any  symptom,  it 
bespeaks  the  problem  and  the  solution.  Larger  ritual  placement  of  the 

Khan,  M.  R.  “The  Use  and  Abuse  of  Dream  in  Psychic  Experience,”  The  Privacy  of  the 
Self  (New  York:  International  Universities  Press,  1974),  306-315. 

20  N.  Doughtery  and  J.  West,  “Skin:  Boundaries,  Penetrations  and  Power”  (paper 
presented  at  the  National  Jungian  Congress,  Chicago,  1997). 


258 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


symptom  can  help  the  analytical  couple  find  how  to  cut  open  a portal  between 
a too  small  consciousness  and  a deeper  flow  of  life  within  such  women’s  bodies 
and  souls.21 


V.  Ethics 

If  the  product  of  going  down  into  a different  consciousness  is  living,  and 
not  money,  sermons,  recipes,  fame,  lectures,  degrees,  jobs,  and  all  the  things 
of  this  life  that  we  reify,  prize,  and  make  into  idols,  then  our  relationship  with 
each  other  changes.  Ethics  changes  from  a giving  of  helper  to  helpee  to  a 
receiving  and  yielding  of  overflow.  Living  from  a core  that  animates  and  feeds 
all  of  us,  we  feel  and  know  the  spark  of  its  presence  between  us  and  among  us 
that  keeps  all  of  us  in  being  and  redeems  us  from  sadness.  We  become  one  of 
the  animals  in  a tide  of  instinct  that  guides  us,  and  that  we  consent  to,  making 
us  human  animals  specifically  marked,  not  by  stripe  or  hoof  or  fur,  but  by 
consent,  again  and  again.  Something  flows  through  us,  out  and  back  from  a 
center  beyond  us,  which  contacts  us  also  through  a deeper  consciousness  and  a 
consciousness  of  the  depth.  It  generates  us.  It  engenders  us.  Like  the  Sioux 
medicine  man  Fool  Crow’s  “hollow  bones,”  we  become  empty  to  accommo- 
date its  fullness.  All  together,  we  share  its  presence;  if  one  of  us  goes  missing, 
we  cannot  proceed  until  we  go  out  and  look  for  the  one  who  is  missing.  That 
may  be  a part  of  us  or  a group  of  us.  It  deserves  to  be  found.  We  also  see  that 
others  carry  things  for  us.  The  one  suffering  severe  mental  restriction  carries 
the  cross  I do  not  carry  and  evokes  from  my  gratitude  a willingness  to  carry 
the  cross  assigned  to  me.  We  see  that  each  of  us  does  not,  contra  the  fervent 
press  of  psychological  workships,  achieve  wholeness,  but  we  become  part  of  a 
greater  wholeness.  We  do  not  enter  into  congress  with  this  presence  flowing 
through  us  in  the  role  of  co-creators,  but  instead  as  co-respondents.  The  pun 
both  indicates  our  capacity  for  betrayal  as  well  as  full-out  risk-taking  response. 
We  enter  into  and  are  pulled  into  the  currents  of  a thrumming,  humming  love 
that  undergirds  all  reality,  flowing  ceaselessly  out  of  its  center  into  and  round 
and  among  all  of  us,  back  and  forth  between  us,  then  lunging  down  again  into 
the  depths.  Only  to  pour  out  generously  upon  us. 

An  image  of  Saint  Dorotheus  pictures  the  way  the  ethics  of  overflow  works. 
Each  of  us  as  a spoke  of  a wheel  finds,  as  we  draw  closer  and  closer  to  the 
wrheel’s  center  to  the  cog  from  which  all  the  spokes  turn  and  revolve,  that  we 
inevitably  also  draw  closer  to  each  other.  This  is  consciousness,  so  precious  a 
gift  to  us,  that  we  give  back  into  its  Giver. 


21  Ibid. 


Reflections  on  Worship 
in  the  Gospel  of  John 

by  Marianne  Meye  Thompson 


The  1997-1998  Thompson  Lecture  was 
given  by  Marianne  Meye  Thompson  on 
March  16,  1998,  on  the  Seminary  campus. 
Dr.  Th  07 up  son,  a minister  of  the  Presbyte- 
rian Church  (U.S.A.),  is  Associate  Profes- 
sor of  New  Testament  Interpretation  at 
Fuller  Theological  Seminaiy,  Pasadena , 
California. 


MY  POINT  OF  departure  this  evening  is  taken  from  two  quotations,  both 
from  C.  K.  Barrett,  the  noted  Johannine  scholar.  The  first  quotation 
comes  from  Barrett’s  magisterial  commentary  on  John,  originally  published 
in  1955  and  revised  in  1978.  In  that  second  edition,  Barrett  adds  a short 
comment  on  John  4:23,  a verse  that  reads  as  follows:  “The  hour  is  coming, 
and  now  is,  when  true  worshipers  shall  worship  the  Father  in  spirit  and  in 
truth,  for  such  the  Father  seeks  to  worship  him."  Focusing  on  the  explanatory 
clause  at  the  end,  Barrett  remarked,  “This  clause  has  perhaps  as  much  claim  as 
20-3of  to  be  regarded  as  expressing  the  purpose  of  the  gospel.”1  You  may 
recall  that  John  20:31  reads,  “These  things  are  written  that  you  may  believe 
that  Jesus  is  the  Christ,  the  Son  of  God,  and  that  by  believing  you  may  have 
life  in  his  name.”  Barrett’s  assertion  that  4:23  rivals  20:31  in  capturing  the 
purpose  of  John  may  look  like  just  a passing  comment,  but  it  actually  charts  a 
huge  shift  in  the  Fourth  Gospel’s  center  of  gravity.  In  essence,  he  gauges 
“worship”  in  the  Gospel  of  John  as  possessing  fully  enough  mass  to  counter- 
balance all  that  had  hitherto  been  imputed  to  “belief’  or  evangelism  as 
constituting  the  evangelist’s  purpose.  But  he  also  shifts  the  center  from  the 
Son  to  the  Father.  It  is  tempting  to  speculate  that  the  gloss  which  Barrett 
added  in  1978  is  a response  to  a number  of  studies  which,  in  the  years  between 
the  two  editions  of  the  commentary,  laid  increasing  stress  on  the  Gospel  as  a 
“dogmatic”  Gospel  which  makes  Jesus  the  object  and  content  of  belief.2  In  any 
case,  Barrett’s  assertion  conveniently  underscores  and  unites  two  items  of 
concern  in  the  present  lecture:  namely,  the  centrality  of  God  in  the  Fourth 
Gospel,  and  the  singular  importance  of  genuine  worship  to  its  argument. 

A few  years  before  the  publication  of  the  second  edition  of  the  commentary, 
Barrett  had  emphasized  the  centrality  of  God  in  the  Fourth  Gospel  in  an 
article  whose  title  posed  the  question,  “Theocentric  or  Christocentric?”  As 
might  be  anticipated,  Barrett  answered  that  the  Gospel  is  best  described  as 


1 The  Gospel  According  to  St.John,  2nd  rev.  ed.  (Philadelphia:  Westminster,  1978),  238. 

2 Most  notably,  perhaps,  Ernst  Kiisemann,  The  Testament  of  Jesus:  A Study  of  the  Gospel  of 
John  in  the  Light  of  Chapter  17  (Philadelphia:  Fortress,  1968). 


260 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


theocentric.  But  Barrett  nuanced  his  position  as  follows— and  this  is  my 
second  quotation: 

It  is  inconceivable  that  John  should  have  written  the  kind  of  book  he  did 
write  if  he  had  not  wished  to  attach  unique  theological  significance  to  the 
historical  figure  of  Jesus,  or  rather  (as  [John]  might  have  preferred  to  say), 
had  he  not  seen  theological  truth  of  unique  importance  arising  out  of  that 
historical  figure.  There  can  be  no  doubt  then  that  for  John  the  historical 
figure  of  Jesus  was  central  for  his  understanding  of  God;  central,  but  not 
finaD 

Not  long  before  this,  Barrett  had  made  a similarly  enigmatic  statement— 
“There  could  hardly  be  a more  Christocentric  writer  than  John,  yet  his  very 
Christocentricity  is  theocentric.”* 

I begin  with  these  quotations,  because  I wish  to  address  myself  to  the 
substance  of  Barrett’s  twin  affirmations  regarding  God  and  worship,  and  to 
argue  that  not  only  are  his  predications  separately  correct,  but  that  they  also 
belong  together  as  an  apt  description  of  the  theological  concern  of  the  Fourth 
Gospel.  I begin  with  them  also  because  these  assertions  stand  against  the  main 
current  of  Johannine  studies  today,  which  flow  along  a somewhat  different 
course.  That  course  is  charted,  for  example,  by  Robert  Kysar  in  his  lengthy 
“Report  on  Recent  Research”  on  John,  where  he  notes,  “No  one  seriously 
doubts  that  the  heartbeat  of  the  theology  of  the  [Fourth  Gospel]  is  found  in  its 
christology.”’  A1  though  that  comment  was  made  over  ten  years  ago,  other 
scholars  treat  the  Gospel’s  christocentricity  as  virtually  a truism.3 * 5 6 

In  good  Johannine  fashion,  however,  there  are  some  doubters  in  the  ranks.  I 
put  myself  with  Thomas,  demanding— I hope  not  faithlessly— “Unless  I see 
the  indisputable  marks  of  the  Gospel’s  christocentricity,  I will  not  believe.” 
To  be  sure,  the  designation  of  the  Gospel  as  “christocentric”  has  not  arisen  ex 
nihilo  or  from  the  formless  void,  but  rather  has  been  created  out  of  some  very 

3 “Christocentric  or  Theocentric?  Observations  on  the  Theological  Method  of  the 
Fourth  Gospel,”  in  La  Notion  biblique  de  Dieu,  ed.  J.  Coppens;  Bibliotheca  Ephemeridum 
Theologicarum  Lovaniensium  41  (Leuven:  University  Press,  1976),  364. 

* “ ‘The  Father  is  Greater  than  I’  (John  14.28):  Subordinationist  Christology'  in  the  New 
Testament,”  Essays  on  John  (Philadelphia:  Westminster,  1971),  246. 

5 Aufitiegund Niedergang der  romischen  Welt,  2:25.3  (1985),  2443. 

6 Adele  Reinhartz  affirms  Kysar’s  assessment  with  the  comment,  “Christology  is  the 
central  theme  of  this  gospel,”  and  adds,  “This  is  virtually  axiomatic  in  Johannine  studies.” 
The  Word  in  the  World:  The  Cosmological  Tale  in  the  Fourth  Gospel,  SBLMS  45  (Atlanta: 
Scholars  Press,  1992),  30  and  n.  1).  By  contrast,  see  the  statement  by  William  Loader,  that 
“the  theocentricity  of  the  gospel  is  widely  recognised.”  The  Christology  of  the  Fourth  Gospel: 
Structure  and  Issues,  BET  23  (Frankfurt  am  Main:  Lang,  1989),  140.  Loader  cites  works  by 
C.  K.  Barrett,  C.  H.  Dodd,  Ernst  Haenchen,  Ferdinand  Hahn,  and  Rudolf  Sehnackenburg 
in  support  of  his  contention. 


26i 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN 

real  “stuff’  in  the  Gospel.  There  is  unquestionably  an  emphasis  on  the  work 
and  role  of  Jesus  in  John,  and  that  work  and  role  are  developed  in  striking  and 
distinctive  ways.  But  precisely  in  those  distinctive  developments  the  Christol- 
ogy  of  John  demands  to  be  set  in  a genuinely  theological  framework.  As 
Leander  Keck  once  put  it,  “every  statement  about  Christ  implicates  God, 
beginning  with  the  designation  of  Jesus  as  the  Anointed.”? 

The  intense  focus  in  recent  decades  on  Christology  as  the  heart  of  the 
Gospel  fits  hand  in  glove  with  an  understanding  of  its  place  and  polemic 
vis-a-vis  Judaism.  A persistent  description  of  Johannine  theology  is  that  it 
repudiates  Judaism  by  means  of  its  allegedly  christocentric  “replacement 
theology.”  Such  a characterization  rests  much  of  its  case  on  the  Gospel’s 
presentation  of  Jesus  in  light  of  and  with  respect  to  various  Jewish  practices 
and  institutions  of  worship.  Typical  characterizations  include  statements  such 
as  the  following:  “All  previous  religious  institutions,  customs  and  feasts  lose 
meaning  in  [Jesus’]  presence.”8  Or:  “Jesus  supersedes  the  great  pilgrim 
festivals;  he  fulfills  the  symbolism  of  the  feast  of  tabernacles  . . .Jesus  fulfills 
and  thus  supersedes  the  purity  regulations  of  Judaism.  ...  In  Jesus  the 
Messiah  the  old  Temple  and  cult  has  been  rendered  redundant.”9  Or:  “Jesus 
even  replaced  the  Sabbath,  Passover,  Feast  of  Booths,  and  Feast  of  Dedica- 
tion.”10 These  readings  — from  Raymond  Brown,  James  Dunn,  and  Craig 
Koester— argue  that  John’s  treatment  of  worship-related  themes  repudiates 
Judaism  and  its  cultic  practices  and  religious  feasts,  and  does  so  by  radically 
reinterpreting  these  practices  and  feasts  through  and  in  the  person  of  Jesus 
Christ. 

On  a slightly  different  tack,  J.  Louis  Martyn  refocused  the  argument  about 
the  relationship  of  Jesus  and  Judaism  from  the  text  to  the  community  behind 
the  text  and  for  which  the  Gospel  was  written.  As  is  well  known,  Martyn 
argued  that  the  Johannine  community’s  gradual  development  of  a relatively 
exalted  view  of  Jesus  eventually  drove  the  wedge  between  it  and  the  synagogue 
community  from  which  it  broke  or  was  expelled.  But  even  the  high  Christol- 
ogy of  the  Johannine  community  could  not,  on  its  own,  account  for  the 


? “Toward  the  Renewal  of  New  Testament  Christology,”  New  Testament  Studies  32  July 
1986):  362-77.  See  also  J.  D.  G.  Dunn,  “Christology  as  an  Aspect  of  Theology,”  in  The 
Future  of  Christology:  Essays  in  Honor  of  Leander  E.  Keck  (Minneapolis:  Fortress,  1993),  202-3. 

8 Raymond  E.  Brown,  The  Gospel  According  to  John,  2 vols.,  (New  York:  Doubleday, 
1966-70)  1:104. 

’James  D.  G.  Dunn,  The  Partings  of  the  Ways  Between  Christianity  and  Judaism  and  their 
Significance  for  the  Character  of  Christianity  (London:  SCM  Press;  Philadelphia:  T rinity  Press 
International,  1991),  93—95. 

10  Craig  Koester,  The  Dwelling  of  God,  CBQMS  22  (Washington,  DC:  Catholic  Biblical 
Association,  1989),  108. 


262 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


palpable  tension  in  the  Gospel  between  the  two  communities.  Rather,  this 
tension  developed  because  a relatively  exalted  view  of  Jesus  was  coupled  with 
the  practice  of  worshiping  him.  This  practice  led  to  the  charge  of  ditheism  which 
is  implicitly  a charge  of  false  worship.11 

Martyn’s  proposal  has  the  merit  of  taking  seriously  that  one  of  the  sources, 
if  not  the  main  source,  of  conflict  between  John’s  community  and  the 
synagogue  was  the  community’s  practices  of  worship. 12  John’s  community  was 
in  conflict  with  “the  Jews”  not  simply  because  of  what  it  believed,  but  because 
of  the  way  in  which  its  beliefs  were  mirrored  in  its  practices . Whether  or  not  one 
thinks  that  the  Gospel  is  as  “transparently  revelatory”1?  of  the  community  as 
Martyn  does,  his  interpretation  of  the  conflict  in  John  not  only  in  terms  of 
what  is  to  be  believed,  but  how  one  is  to  worship,  seems  right  on  target.  Some 
interpreters,  however,  have  argued  that  in  its  treatment  of  this  conflict,  John’s 
Gospel  essentially  creates  a broad,  ugly  ditch  between  itself  and  “the  Jews,”  as 
if  all  common  ground  had  been  removed.12?  This  conclusion  seems  rather  off 
the  mark. 

I propose  to  reexamine  certain  passages  related  to  worship  of  God  in  the 
Gospel  by  setting  them  against  a taxonomy  of  contemporary  Jewish  polemics 
regarding  worship.  The  literature  of  Second  Temple  Judaism  testifies  to  a 
wide  range  of  ongoing  discussion  and  argument  about  the  character,  means, 
and  object  of  true  worship,  ranging  from  sectarian  debates  about  halakhic 
practice,  purity  regulations,  the  temple,  and  issues  of  calendar  (Jubilees, 
nQTemple,  4QMMT);  to  the  possibility  of  various  visionary  or  mystical 
experiences  allowing  for  participation  in  heavenly  worship  (e.g.,  Songs  of  the 
Sabbath  Sacrifice,  1 Enoch);  to  the  necessity  of  the  continued  defense  of 
monotheism  and  monolatry  (e.g.,  Embassy  to  Gains , Joseph  and  Aseneth).  By 
reading  Johannine  polemics  against  this  backdrop,  I hope  to  show,  first,  the 

II  History  and  Theology  in  the  Fourth  Gospel,  rev.  ed.  (Nashville:  Abingdon,  1979),  72,  75, 
78- 

12  David  Aune  has  emphasized  the  importance  of  the  cultic  practices  of  the  Johannine 
community,  arguing  that  the  “essential  elements  of  the  theology  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
generally,  and  the  eschatology  of  the  Gospel  in  particular,  were  developed  within  the 
context  of  the  worship,  preaching  and  teaching  of  . . . the  ‘Johannine  community.’  ” The 
Cultic  Setting  of  Realized  Eschatology  in  Early  Christianity  (Leiden:  Brill,  1972),  63.  See  also 
Larry  Hurtado,  One  God,  One  Lord:  Early  Christian  Devotion  and  Ancient  Jewish  Monotheism 
(Fortress:  Philadelphia,  1988),  13,  “The  cultic  veneration  of  Jesus  in  early  Christian  circles 
is  the  most  important  context  for  the  use  of  the  christological  titles  and  concepts.”  See  also 
Martin  Hengel,  “Christological  Tides  in  Early  Christianity,”  in  Studies  in  Early  Christology; 
(Edinburgh:  T.  & T.  Clark,  1995),  370,  383. 

't  The  phrase  comes  from  Richard  Bauckham,  “For  Whom  Were  Gospels  Written?”  in 
The  Gospels  for  all  Christians:  Rethinking  the  Gospel  Audience  (Edinburgh:  1'.  & T.  Clark; 
Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1998),  26. 

'4  See,  for  example,  Halvor  Moxnes,  Theology  in  Conflict:  Studies  in  Paul's  Understanding  of 
God  in  Romans,  SuppNovT  53  (Leiden:  Brill,  1980). 


263 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN 

need  for  greater  exegetical  precision  in  tracing  the  argument  of  the  Fourth 
Gospel.  This  precision,  in  turn,  can  spur  us  to  rethink  some  assumptions 
commonly  held  about  the  Gospel,  its  Christology,  and  its  stance  over  against 
Judaism  and  its  festivals,  rituals,  and  worship. 


I.  A Taxonomy  of  Post-Biblical  Polemic  Regarding  Worship 

The  Fourth  Gospel’s  treatment  of  themes  having  to  do  with  (true)  worship 
can  be  illumined  by  the  ways  in  which  the  Old  Testament  polemic  against  the 
worship  of  other  gods  and  idols  is  taken  up  in  the  literature  of  early  Judaism.1 5 
As  is  well  known,  the  prophetic  denunciation  of  the  worship  of  other  gods 
mocks  those  who  worship  “dead  idols,”  made  by  human  hands,  rather  than 
the  “living  God,”  who  creates  all  things,  including  the  artisans  themselves.16 
“[Idols]  are  the  work  of  the  artisan  and  of  the  hands  of  the  goldsmith; . . . they 
are  all  the  product  of  skilled  workers.  But  the  Lord  is  the  true  God;  he  is  the 
living  God  and  the  everlasting  King”  (Jer.  10:9-10).  Rather  than  a created 
artifact,  the  living  God  is  the  creator  and  source  of  life  (Ps.  36:9,  Jer.  2:13; 
Ezek.  37:1-4).  Although  the  words  of  the  prophets  are  directed  particularly 
against  God’s  own  people  who,  because  they  have  been  called  and  redeemed 
by  God,  are  to  offer  homage  to  that  same  God,  the  polemic  can  also  be  spoken 
against  the  nations  who  worship  idols,  for  they  worship  that  which  is  created 
rather  than  the  Creator  of  all  peoples  and  nations. 17 

In  a number  of  texts  of  Second  Temple  Judaism,  the  polemic  against  idol 
worship  develops  the  theme  of  the  uniqueness  of  the  “living  God”  by 
stressing  the  universality  and  unity  of  God’s  creation,  the  unity  of  that  same 
God,  and  hence  the  universality  of  obligation  owed  to  the  one  true  God.18 
These  foundational  principles  become  the  basis  for  polemic  against  belief  in 
and  worship  of  other  gods.  Yet  these  principles  can  be  used  quite  differently.  I 
suggest  that  there  are  at  least  four  positions  taken  with  respect  to  the  worship 
of  God:  (1)  assimilationists  were  willing  to  engage  in  worship  of  Yahweh,  either 


u On  the  style  of  ancient  polemic,  see  especially  Luke  T.  Johnson,  “The  New  Testa- 
ment’s Anti-Jewish  Slander  and  the  Conventions  of  Ancient  Polemic,”  Journal  of  Biblical 
Literature  108  (1989):  419-41. 

16  1 Sam.  17:26,  36;  2 Kings  19:4,  i6;Jer.  23:36;  Deut.  5:26;Josh.  3:10;  Ps  42:3,  84:3;  Isa. 
40:18-20;  41:21-24;  44:9-20,  24;  45:16-22;  46:5-7;Jer.  10:8-10. 

17  In  the  LXX  monos  theos  is  more  common  than  he  is  theos,  underscoring  the  point  here 
that  the  emphasis  on  “one  God”  serves  as  a call  to  undivided  devotion,  even  as  later  Jewish 
polemic  saw  the  unity  of  God  as  basis  for  the  one  temple. 

18  Paul  Rainbow,  “Monotheism  and  Christology  in  1 Corinthians  8:4-6,”  (D.  Phil,  diss.. 
University  of  Oxford,  1987),  44-46,  lists  ten  features  of  monotheistic  speech  of  Second 
Temple  Judaism,  one  of  which  is  the  theologoumenon  “living  God.” 


264 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


alongside  or  under  the  name  of  another  god;19  (2)  apologists  such  as  Josephus 
and  Philo  limited  proper  worship  to  Israel’s  God,  but  sought  to  find  common 
ground  with  pagans  by  showing  the  ways  in  which  they  shared  religious, 
philosophical  or  moral  convictions  with  Judaism;20  (3)  separationists  labeled 
the  worship  of  pagans  either  idolatrous  or  demonic,  or  perhaps  both;21  (4)  and 
sectarians , such  as  the  covenanters  of  Qumran,  found  objectionable  practices 
even  among  their  fellow  Jews  who  also  worshiped  the  one  God  of  Israel. 

Of  these  four  positions,  the  Fourth  Gospel  perhaps  comes  closest  to  the 
sectarian  position,  as  found  in  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls,  in  suggesting  that  it  is  the 
worship  practices  of  coreligionists  that  signal  their  betrayal  of  truth.  Much  of 
the  invective  of  the  Scrolls  is  directed  against  those  Jews  who  have  abandoned 
the  covenant,  failed  to  observe  the  Law,  improperly  celebrate  festivals,  or 
defiled  the  holy  temple  and  city  (iQpHab  2.6-7,  8.10;  12:8-10;  4QpPsa 
2:14-20;  CD  4:17;  6:11-21).  Similarly,  Johannine  polemic  charges  that  “the 
Jews”  fail  to  understand  the  testimony  of  Moses  in  scripture,  oppose 
righteousness  and  truth,  and  are  not  true  children  of  Abraham.  The  use  of  the 
Jewish  calendar  to  frame  the  Gospel,  and  the  recurring  themes  of  purity, 
temple,  worship,  and  various  festivals,  suggest  that  sharp  differences  over 


19  Perhaps  the  most  notorious  exemplars  of  this  position  are  those  Jews  who  were  willing 
to  follow  Antiochus  Epiphanes’  commands  to  engage  in  pagan  sacrifices  and  worship. 
According  to  Josephus,  the  high  priest  Onias  (Menelaus)  had  persuaded  Antiochus  “to 
compel  the  Jews  to  abandon  their  fathers’  religion”  in  order  that  he  might  “secure  his  own 
position”  (Ant.  12:283;  2 Macc.  13:4).  What  sort  of  justification  Menelaus  may  have 
suggested  for  such  practice  is  not  known,  but  it  is  not  unlikely  that  he  and  others  adopted 
the  view  that  religious  particularism  or  exclusivism  was  an  unenlightened  barbarism.  For 
further  discussion,  see  Elias  Bickerman,  The  God  of  the  Maccabees:  Studies  on  the  Meaning  and 
Origin  of  the  Maccabean  Revolt,  Studies  in  Judaism  in  Late  Antiquity  32  (Leiden:  Brill,  1979), 
esp.  64-65,  76—92;  Martin  Hengel,  Judaism  and  Hellenism:  Studies  in  the  Encounter  in 
Palestine  during  the  Early  Hellenistic  Period,  2 vols.,  (Philadelphia:  Fortress,  1974),  1:264-65; 
Emil  Schiirer,  The  History  of  the  Jewish  People  in  the  Age  of  Jesus  Christ,  rev.  ed.  by  Geza 
Vermes  and  Fergus  Millar,  3 vols.,  (Edinburgh:  T.  & T.  Clark,  1973),  3:1.523. 

20  See  Schiirer,  History  of  the  Jewish  People,  3:1.154.  A Christian  example  of  such  an 
overture  is  found  in  Paul’s  speech  to  the  Athenians  in  Acts  17,  when  he  says  that  “the  God 
who  made  the  world  and  everything  in  it,  being  Lord  of  heaven  and  earth  ...  is  not  far  from 
each  one  of  us,  for  ‘In  him  we  live  and  move  and  have  our  being’  ” (Acts  17:24,  28).  This 
God,  Paul  proclaims,  does  not  live  in  hand-made  temples,  nor  ought  one  to  represent  God 
by  hand-made  artifacts.  The  emphasis  on  God  as  living,  acknowledged  as  the  source  or 
Creator  of  all  that  is,  accounts  for  the  polemic  against  the  worship  of  animals  and  artifacts 
even  in  writers  who  also  endeavor  to  demonstrate  the  commonality  between  the  concep- 
tions of  deity  in  Judaism  and  in  other  religions. 

21  Following  the  trajectory  of  prophetic  denunciation  of  idol  worship,  some  Jewish 
writings  leave  no  room  for  common  ground  between  Jews  and  pagans:  Jews  alone  worship 
the  true  God,  and  any  other  worship  is  offered  to  idols  and  demons  (Dan.,  Bel,  Jdt.,  Joseph 
and  Aseneth,  1 En.),  themes  already  attested  in  passages  such  as  Deut.  32:17,  Ps.  96:5  and 
106:37.  See  here  the  Epistle  to  Diognetus,  which  attacks  pagan  worship  of  idols  (chap.  2),  and 
Jewish  worship  for  thinking  that  God  needs  die  sacrifices  of  food  which  they  offer  (chap.  3). 
See  Schiirer,  History  of  the  Jewish  People,  3:1.138;  Hengel,  Judaism  and  Hellenism,  1:261-67. 


i65 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN 

practices  in  worship  figure  into  the  Johannine  polemic  as  well.  But,  in  the 
Fourth  Gospel,  as  in  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls,  it  is  not  the  object  of  worship  that 
is  at  issue,  but  rather  the  practices. 

II.  The  Polemic  Regarding  Worship  in  the  Gospel  of  John 
Jesus,  the  Temple,  and  the  Worship  of  God 

I would  like  to  pursue  this  reading  of  John  by  turning  first  to  the  treatment 
of  the  temple  in  the  Fourth  Gospel.  In  his  book  The  Scepter  and  the  Star,  John 
J.  Collins  writes,  “Alienation  from  the  Temple  cult  was  one  of  the  root  causes 
of  Jewish  sectarianism  in  the  Hellenistic  era.”22  The  community  at  Qumran 
serves  as  a prime  exemplar  of  such  alienation,  but  its  literature  testifies  to 
diverse  remedies  for  the  ailment,  including  the  establishment  of  a new, 
eschatological  temple;  a “takeover”  or  rededication  of  the  present  Jerusalem 
temple  (4QpPs  37:3,  iofi);  and,  an  interpretation  of  the  community  itself  as  an 
alternate  temple  where  atonement  for  sin  is  made.2?  Not  surprisingly,  these 
views  are  coupled  with  sharp  polemic  against  the  corrupt  practices  of  the 
priests  in  the  Jerusalem  temple  (CD  4:16-18;  5:6-7).  The  Scrolls  testify  not 
only  to  the  community’s  dissatisfaction  with  the  way  in  which  the  office  of  the 
priesthood  was  exercised,  but  also  to  its  differences  with  the  Jerusalem 
priesthood  in  calendrical  matters  and  halakhic  regulations  regarding  purity 
(4QMMT).  In  view  of  the  deficiencies  of  the  current  priesthood,  the  current 
temple  cult  was  deemed  ineffective.  But  atonement  for  sin  could  be  made 
within  the  “holy  house  for  Aaron,”  the  community  itself  (iQS  8:6,  8:10; 
9:3-6,  26;  10:6,  14). 24 

Jewish  literature  written  after  the  First  Jewish  War  and  the  destruction  of 
Jerusalem  encounters  a difficulty  of  another  sort,  one  that  has  to  do  with 
accounting  for  the  absence  of  the  temple.  Not  unlike  the  sectarians,  Josephus 
lays  the  blame  for  the  pollution  of  the  temple  at  the  feet  not  of  Gentiles,  but  of 
fellow  Israelites.  While  on  the  one  hand  Josephus  faults  the  high  priesthood 
for  its  corruption,  greed,  and  violence  {Ant.  20.8.8  §181;  20. 9. 2. §§206-7), 

22  The  Scepter  and  the  Star:  The  Messiahs  of  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  and  Other  Ancient  Literature 
(New  York:  Doubleday,  1995),  84. 

n The  relevant  passages  from  Qumran  (iQS  5:5-7,  8:4-10,  9:3-6;  CD  3:18-4:10;  iQpH 
12:3)  are  discussed  by  Donald  Juel,  Messiah  and  Temple:  The  Trial  of  Jesus  in  the  Gospel  of 
Mark,  SBLDS  31  (Missoula:  Scholars  Press,  1977),  159-68. 

24  Yet  other  documents  point  to  the  promise  of  a new  or  eschatological  temple,  and  in 
these  documents,  the  equation  of  the  temple  with  the  community  is  either  lacking  or 
ambiguous.  The  particular  text  most  in  discussion  here  is  4QFlor  (4Q174);  see  the 
discussion  and  bibliography  in  Collins,  The  Scepter  and  the  Star,  106-9.  h *s  not  clear  that 
4QFlor  equates  the  temple  with  the  Qumran  community  itself;  so  also  Juel,  Messiah  and 
Temple,  164. 


266 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


elsewhere  he  criticizes  the  revolutionaries  for  turning  the  temple  into  a 
fortress.  Although  he  continues  to  refer  to  it  as  the  “Holy  Place”  (J.W. 
4.3.607  §§147-54),  he  also  laments  of  the  temple,  “You  were  no  longer  the 
place  of  God”  (J.W.  5.1.3  §§19-20).  Josephus  even  goes  so  far  as  to  argue  that 
while  the  revolutionaries  have  polluted  the  temple,  the  Romans  have 
endeavored  to  keep  it  pure,  thus  subverting  the  assumption  that  it  is  Gentiles 
who  render  sacred  space  unclean  J.W.  4.182-83;  5:362-63;  6:99-102; 
6:124-28).  Likewise,  Josephus  virtually  exonerates  Pompey  for  his  obvious 
profanation  of  the  temple  by  arguing  that,  because  of  his  piety  and  virtue,  he 
ordered  it  to  be  cleansed  immediately  J.W.  1:152-53;  Ant.  14:72-73). 
Obviously  then  one  of  the  key  attributes  of  the  temple  is  purity,  and  its 
absence  accounts  for  the  destruction  of  the  temple. 

The  purity  of  the  temple  underlies  the  presentation  of  the  temple  in  the 
Fourth  Gospel.  As  is  well  known,  in  the  Fourth  Gospel  the  cleansing  of  the 
temple  appears  early.  It  is  preceded  by  and  paired  with  the  changing  of  water 
to  wine  at  a wedding  feast  in  Cana,  which  defines  Jesus’  glory  not  only  as 
bringing  the  fullness  of  the  messianic  age,  but  also  as  effecting  an  appropriate 
purity.  That  Jesus  changes  the  water  of  the  “Jewish  rites  of  purification”  into 
the  wine  of  the  messianic  era  could  be  construed  in  various  ways:  the  vine 
could  be  said  to  replace  the  water  or,  more  sharply,  to  displace  it.  Both  of 
these  ways  of  interpreting  the  text  depend,  to  some  extent,  on  a negative 
valuation  either  of  these  Jewish  rites  or  of  the  concept  of  “purity”  per  se,  as 
well  as  on  construing  “messianic  fullness”  as  “messianic  replacement .”  But  the 
effectiveness  of  the  narrative  depends  upon  affirming  the  central  importance 
of  purity,  while  identifying  it  not  with  priest  or  Law,  but  with  Jesus,  already 
presented  in  the  first  chapter  of  the  Gospel  as  Messiah,  Son  of  God,  King  of 
Israel,  and  Son  of  Man  (1:51).  Jesus  is  portrayed  as  Israel’s  Messiah , and  the 
miracle  at  Cana  does  not  signal  messianic  replacement  but  rather  messianic 
fullness,  in  keeping  with  the  words  of  the  prologue,  “from  his  fullness  have  we 
all  received.”  But  the  account  in  which  this  point  is  scored  has  to  do  with  the 
“Jewish  rites  of  purification.”  Messianic  fullness  thus  entails  messianic 
cleansing.  Early  on,  the  Gospel  forges  an  integral  link  between  the  Messiah, 
the  “King  of  Israel,”  and  the  Jewish  rites  of  purification. 

The  Johannine  version  of  the  cleansing  of  the  temple  follows  this  account, 
rather  than  the  account  of  Jesus’  triumphal  and  kingly  entry  into  Jerusalem, 
described  both  in  John  and  the  Synoptic  Gospels  in  terms  of  Zechariah  9:9. 
John  alone  thus  juxtaposes  the  cleansing  of  the  temple  with  another  account 
about  cleansing  or  purity,  rather  than  with  an  account  about  a symbolic  royal 
action.  In  the  Fourth  Gospel,  the  account  concludes  with  Jesus’  challenge 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN 


267 


regarding  the  destruction  and  raising  of  the  temple  in  three  days.  An  editorial 
comment  makes  it  clear  that  Jesus  was  talking  not  about  the  Jerusalem  temple, 
but  rather  about  “the  temple  of  his  body”  (2:21).  To  be  precise,  then,  the  text 
does  not  say  that  if  the  Jerusalem  temple  is  destroyed  it  will  be  replaced  by 
another  temple,  but  rather  that  if  the  temple  of  Jesus’  body  is  destroyed,  it  will 
be  raised  up  in  three  days.  By  referring  Jesus’  word  regarding  the  destruction 
and  rebuilding  of  the  temple  to  his  own  death  and  resurrection,  John  presents 
Jesus  as  the  indestructible  eschatological  temple. 25  The  argument  is  not  that 
Jesus’  followers  do  not  need  a temple,  but  rather  that  in  him  they  have  a 
temple  which  cannot  be  destroyed. 

Later  in  the  Gospel  it  becomes  evident  that  the  Messiah  “cleanses”  his 
followers  through  his  death,  prefigured  in  the  act  of  washing  their  feet 
(13:1-11),  as  well  as  through  his  life-giving  word,  which  leads  them  to  faith 
(15:3).  John  thus  underscores  the  singular  importance  of  purity  or  cleansing 
and  their  provision  through  the  word  and  deed  of  Jesus.  Jesus  thus  effects  the 
purification  of  his  followers.  John,  however,  goes  further.  Just  as  the  temple 
symbolized  the  purity  of  Israel  and  of  Israel’s  God,  so  too  Jesus  embodies, 
manifests,  and  transmits  true  purity. 

This  takes  us  back  to  the  narrative  of  John  4,  where  Jesus,  the  Messiah  of 
Israel,  engages  in  debate  over  the  true  site  for  temple  worship  with  a woman 
of  Samaria  — a discussion  conducted  while  standing  over  a well  of  water, 
symbolic  of  cleansing!  The  primary  understanding  of  the  temple  in  both 
chapters  two  and  four  is  that  it  is  the  locus  of  God’s  presence.26  In  this 
understanding  of  the  temple,  God’s  purity  and  God’s  presence  are  necessarily 
conjoined,  so  that  “the  notion  of  purity  associated  with  the  Temple  . . . 
intensifies  the  sense  of  divine  nearness.  . . . The  closer  one  gets  to  the  inner 


25  For  discussion  and  bibliography  concerning  the  link  between  Messiah  and  temple,  see 
N.  T.  Wright,  Jesus  and  the  Victoiy  of  God,  vol.  2 of  Christian  Origins  and  the  Question  of  God 
(Minneapolis:  Fortress,  1996),  489-519. 

26  “In  the  eyes  of  the  people  [the  temple]  constituted  primarily  the  divine  dwelling-place 
of  the  God  of  Israel  which  set  them  apart  from  other  nations”  (The  Jewish  People  in  the  First 
Century : Historical  Geography,  Political  History,  Social,  Cultural  and  Religious  Life  and  Institu- 
tions, vol.  2,  ed.  S.  Safrai  and  M.  Stern  (Assen:  Van  Gorcum;  Philadelphia:  Fortress,  1976), 
906.  For  recent  discussions  emphasizing  the  centrality  and  importance  of  the  temple  and  its 
significance  in  first-century  Judaism,  see  E.  P.  Sanders,  Judaism:  Practice  and  Belief,  63 
BCE-66  CE  (London:  SCM;  Philadelphia:  Trinity  Press  International,  1993),  chaps.  5-8, 
and  The  Historical  Figure  of  Jesus  (London:  Penguin  Books,  1993),  262;  as  well  as  the  older 
discussion  by  G.  F.  Moore,  Judaism  in  the  First  Centuries  of  the  Christian  Era:  The  Age  of  the 
Tannaim,  3 vols.,  (Cambridge,  Mass:  Flarvard  University  Press,  1927-30),  1:369b  Craig 
Koester,  in  his  recent  study  on  symbolism  in  the  Fourth  Gospel,  comments  that  the 
pericope  of  the  cleansing  of  the  temple  suggests  that  “the  function  of  sacrifice  ...  is  fulfilled 
and  replaced  by  Jesus.”  Symbolism  in  the  Fourth  Gospel:  Meaning,  Mysteiy,  Community 
(Minneapolis:  Portress,  1995),  83.  But  the  polemic  is  much  more  pointed  in  a book  like 
Hebrews  than  in  John,  where  it  is  at  best  latent. 


268 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


sanctum,  the  nearer  one  is  to  the  perfection  of  the  divine  presence. ”27 
According  to  the  Johannine  prologue,  one  is  near  to  “the  perfection  of  the 
divine  presence”  in  Jesus:  “The  Word  became  flesh  and  dwelt  among  us,  and 
we  have  beheld  his  glory,  glory  as  of  the  only  Son  from  the  Father,  full  of 
grace  and  truth.”  This  assertion  recalls  the  accounts  of  God’s  dwelling  with 
Israel  in  the  wilderness,  as  well  as  the  revelation  of  God  to  Moses  in  response 
to  his  demand,  “Show  me  thy  glory”  (Ex.  33:18).  The  language  of  John  1:14  is 
that  of  theophany,  of  the  revelation  of  the  glory  or  presence  of  God.28  So  also 
in  John  1:51  the  disciples  are  promised  revelation:  heaven  will  be  opened,  and 
heavenly  presence  will  be  manifested.  Jesus  is  the  “sanctuary”  in  and  through 
which  God’s  presence,  God’s  glory,  is  manifested.29 

In  this  context,  Jesus’  retort  to  the  Samaritan  woman  (“the  hour  is  coming 
. . . when  neither  on  this  mountain  nor  in  Jerusalem  will  you  worship  the 
Father”)  regarding  the  proper  place  of  true  worship  constitutes  neither  a 
polemic  against  external  ritual  and  forms  of  worship,  nor  an  argument  in  favor 
of  the  interiorization  of  worship,  nor  a criticism  of  the  idea  of  “sacred  space” 
per  se.  To  be  sure,  these  are  all  common  ways  of  interpreting  the  statement 
that  “true  worshipers  will  worship  the  Father  in  spirit  and  truth. ”3°  In  The 
Partings  of  the  Ways,  for  example,  James  D.  G.  Dunn  asserts  that  John 
criticizes  the  very  notion  of  “sacred  space.”  Dunn  writes: 

The  claim  is  plain:  the  worship  made  possible  by  Jesus  has  left  behind  and 
rendered  redundant  all  the  old  disputes  and  concerns  over  holy  places, 
sacred  spaces,  sanctified  traditions.  Such  concern  now  hinders  or  prevents 
the  real  worship  for  which  God  looks.  That  worship  does  not  depend  on  a 
particular  sanctuary,  central  or  otherwise.  For  the  Fourth  Evangelist  the 
position  is  clear:  Christ  has  taken  the  place  of  the  Temple;  the  concept  of  a 
particular  sacred  space  to  be  guarded  and  defended  against  rivals  and 


r The  Anchor  Bible  Dictionary,  s.v.  “Temple,  Jerusalem,”  by  Carol  Meyers. 

28  Compare  Rev.  21:22-27,  which  speaks  of  the  absence  of  the  temple  in  the  holy  city, 
since  the  temple  has  been  rendered  superfluous  by  the  very  presence  of  God,  whose  glory  is 
the  light  of  the  city. 

29  The  verbal  parallels  with  the  Temple  Scroll  from  Qumran  are  striking.  In  1 iQTemple, 
col.  29,  we  read  this  description  of  the  temple:  “And  find  favor  they  shall;  they  shall  be  my 
people,  and  I will  be  theirs,  forever.  I shall  dwell  with  them  for  all  eternity.  I shall  sanctify 
My  [te]mple  with  My  glory,  for  I will  cause  My  glory  to  dwell  upon  it  until  the  Day  of 
Creation,  when  I Myself  will  create  My  temple;  I will  establish  it  for  Myself  for  everlasting 
in  fulfillment  of  the  covenant  that  I made  with  Jacob  at  Bethel.”  The  Dead  Sea  Scrolls:  A New 
Translation,  trans.  Michael  Wise,  Martin  Abegg,  Jr.,  and  Edward  Cook  (New  York: 
HarperCollins,  1996),  469. 

3°  John  Ashton  reads  this  passage  as  a formal  and  explicit  statement  of  the  “interiorization 
of  worship.”  Understanding  the  Fourth  Gospel  (Oxford:  Clarendon  Press,  1991),  465-66. 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN  269 

defiling  encroachment  is  no  longer  appropriate  in  the  eschatological  ‘now’ 

inaugurated  by  Christ’s  comingT 

Dunn’s  characterization  of  the  Johannine  understanding  of  worship  in  the 
temple  seems  to  me  right  in  what  it  affirms  and  wrong  in  what  it  denies.  On 
the  one  hand,  it  is  clearly  true  that  “the  worship  made  possible  by  Jesus  ...  is 
the  real  worship  for  which  God  looks.”  But  the  conclusion  is  not  that 
“worship  does  not  depend  on  a particular  sanctuary.”  Quite  clearly,  it  does.  In 
Jesus,  protected  sacred  space  and  holy  place  are  not  somehow  rendered 
meaningless;  precisely  the  opposite,  for  the  “holy  place”  is  Jesus  himself.  As 
the  locus  of  God’s  presence,  Jesus  serves  as  the  “place”  of  epiphany,  and  so 
reidentifies  the  “place”  of  worship. 32  The  holy  ground  of  revelation  becomes 
the  sanctified  space  of  worship. 

This  view  reflects  John’s  interpretation  of  the  expectation  (such  as  one  finds 
in  11Q  Temple)  that  God  will  someday  build  the  eschatological  sanctuary. 
Indeed,  the  Fourth  Gospel  makes  clear  that  the  eschatological  hour  has 
struck:  “But  the  hour  is  coming,  and  now  is,  when  . . . those  who  worship  [the 
Father]  must  worship  in  spirit  and  truth.”  The  Johannine  polemic  with 
respect  to  the  temple  does  not  so  much  contrast  mo  rites,  or  two  religions,  or 
two  forms  of  piety,  but  rather  two  eras  and  their  respective  manifestations  of 
the  presence  of  God.  True  worship  is  thus  not  a matter  of  first  discovering  a 
new  object  of  worship,  but  is  rather  a reorientation  of  one’s  worship  through 
and  in  the  presence  of  God  in  the  messianic  temple,  Jesus.  What  Richard 
Bauckham  says  generally  about  early  Christian  worship  applies  also  to  John: 
“The  widespread  views  that  Jesus  was  a radical  critic  of  traditional  Jewish 
worship,  that  early  Christianity  did  not  have  a cult  in  the  proper  sense  of  the 
term,  and  that  Christianity  eliminated  the  usual  distinction  between  the 
sacred  and  the  profane,  are  exaggerated  claims  based  on  modern  theological 
biases  with  tenuous  historical  support  in  early  Christian  literature.”^ 

Indeed,  a close  examination  of  the  Gospel  leads  to  a somewhat  more 
nuanced  understanding  of  the  arguments  regarding  worship  in  the  Fourth 
Gospel:  The  Gospel  is  not  a “radical  critic  of  traditional  Jewish  worship”  so 
much  as  it  is  a critic  of  the  failure  to  recognize  the  eschatological  hour  and  the 
way  in  which  worship  is  appropriately  offered  in  that  hour.  And  insofar  as  it 
understood  Jesus  to  be  the  manifestation  of  God’s  glory  and  presence,  early 
Christianity  validates  “sacred  space,”  while  nevertheless  relocating  it.  The 

3*  The  Partings  of  the  Ways,  93-94. 

v See  Ernst  Haenchen,  A Commentary  on  the  Gospel  of  John,  2 vols.,  (Philadelphia: 
Fortress,  1984),  1:222. 

33  Anchor  Bible  Dictionary,  s.v.  “Worship.” 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


270 

symbols  of  Judaism  which  are  used  to  explicate  his  identity  are  therefore  taken 
up  into  the  person  of  Jesus,  the  Messiah  of  Israel. 

Jesus,  Passover,  and  the  Worship  of  God 

Bauckham’s  contention  that  early  Christianity  did  have  a cult  leads  us  to 
cast  a quick  glance  at  John’s  treatment  of  Passover,  one  of  the  major  festivals 
of  first-century  Judaism  and  of  symbolic  importance  to  the  Gospel  of  John, 
particularly  as  it  lies  behind  the  account  of  the  feeding  miracle  in  John  6. 
Specifically,  I want  to  suggest  that  just  as  the  Gospel  of  John  “relocates” 
sacred  space  in  Jesus,  so  too  it  re-envisions  Passover  as  God’s  saving  work 
through  the  person  of  Jesus. 

The  Johannine  treatment  of  the  festivals  has  provided  some  of  the  most 
important  data  for  christologically  focused  readings  of  the  Gospel  which 
emphasize  discontinuity  with  Judaism.  We  may  recall  some  of  the  statements 
quoted  earlier:  “All  previous  religious  institutions,  customs  and  feasts  lose 
meaning  in  [Jesus’]  presence”;  “Jesus  supersedes  the  great  pilgrim  festivals;  he 
fulfills  the  symbolism  of  the  feast  of  tabernacles  . . . Jesus  fulfills  and  thus 
supersedes  the  purity  regulations  of  Judaism.  . . . In  Jesus  the  Messiah  the  old 
Temple  and  cult  has  been  rendered  redundant”;  and,  “Jesus  even  replaced  the 
Sabbath,  Passover,  Feast  of  Booths,  and  Feast  of  Dedication.” 

Before  proceeding  further,  note  the  awkwardness  of  such  statements, 
which,  for  example,  in  contrasting  Jesus  with  Passover,  contrast  a person  with  a 
festival,  something  that  people  do  in  order  to  commemorate  something  which 
has  happened  or  which  has  been  done  by  someone  else.  One  can  imagine  a 
comparison  between  two  figures,  such  as  Moses  and  Jesus,  or  between  two 
festivals,  such  as  the  Passover  celebration  and  the  Lord’s  Supper,  but  to  argue 
that  Jesus  replaces  Passover  would  be  analogous  to  arguing  that  the  Lord’s 
Supper  replaces  Moses.  All  analogies  break  down;  this  one,  it  seems  to  me,  has 
been  running  on  empty  for  a long  time  . 

Moreover,  in  the  statements  just  cited,  it  was  asserted  that  “Jesus  super- 
sedes the  great  pilgrim  festivals.”  If  the  feast  of  Passover  commemorates 
God’s  deliverance  of  Israel  from  Egypt  and  God’s  leading  of  the  people 
through  the  wilderness,  then  it  makes  little  sense  to  speak  of  Jesus  as 
“superseding”  or  “replacing”  either  God’s  activity  or  Israel’s  remembrance  of 
it.  More  precisely,  the  contrast  lies  on  the  one  hand  between  God’s  saving 
action  in  the  deliverance  from  Egypt,  the  provision  in  the  wilderness,  and  the 
giving  of  the  Law  at  Sinai;  and,  on  the  other,  God’s  saving  action  in  the 
deliverance,  provision,  and  teaching  now  offered  through  Jesus  Christ,  who  is 
the  bread  of  life. 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN  271 

“Bread”  and  “life”  are  key  themes  in  John  6.  As  is  often  pointed  out,  the 
Law  was  sometimes  symbolized  by  manna,  w Bread  itself  was  a symbol  for  the 
nourishment  as  provided  by  the  Law,  and  therefore  the  bread  sent  from 
heaven,  the  manna,  served  aptly  as  a symbol  for  the  Law.  It  is  then  but  a short 
step  to  conceiving  of  wisdom,  sometimes  equated  with  Torah  or  viewed  as 
embodied  in  it,  as  providing  nourishment  or  inviting  people  to  her  feastT 
Even  as  the  Law  was  given  at  Sinai,  and  as  wisdom  accompanied  and  guided 
the  Israelites  all  along  their  pilgrimage  towards  the  promised  land  (Wis. 
10-1 1),  so  now  Jesus,  the  living  bread,  provides  the  sustenance  for  eternal  life. 
The  exodus,  with  its  miraculous  feedings  in  the  wilderness  and  the  giving  of 
the  Law  thus  prefigures  God’s  act  of  deliverance  through  the  Messiah,  Jesus. 36 
But  Jesus  neither  replaces  nor  displaces  that  earlier  act  of  God.  John’s 
presentation  of  Passover  assumes  that  God  did  indeed  act  to  deliver,  sustain, 
and  guide  Israel  in  the  wilderness.  John  6 strikes  the  note  of  finality  and 
fulfillment  with  Jesus’  promise  that  God  is  now  providing  food  that  leads  to 
life  rather  than  death  in  the  wilderness  (6:27,  33,  35,  47-51,  51-58).  In  this 
hour,  God  renews  the  covenant  (6:44-46)  and  gives  the  gift  of  faith  (6:29,  36, 
40),  so  that  those  on  the  journey  may  not  grumble  as  did  the  faithless 
wilderness  generation.  Just  as  God  sustained  the  life  of  the  people  of  Israel  in 
the  wilderness,  so  now  God  provides  through  the  “true  bread  from  heaven” 
the  “bread  of  life.” 

The  juxtaposition  of  these  two  life-giving  acts  of  God  is  not  merely  a 
heuristic  device,  as  though  the  first  Passover  provided  a template  which  could 
simply  be  discarded  once  it  had  been  grasped  that  salvation  is  now  accom- 
plished in  Jesus.  To  be  sure,  the  stakes  in  John  6 are  high.  Specifically,  what  is 
at  stake  in  the  argument  of  John  6 is  the  recognition  and  acknowledgment  of 
God’s  activity  in  Jesus,  construed  in  terms  of  God’s  working  (6:29),  provision 
of  bread  and  life  (6:32-33,  50-51,  57),  and  teaching  (6:44-45).  In  Jesus,  the 
eschatological  hour  has  struck,  with  the  result  that  the  salvation  of  God  has 

34  Mek.  on  Ex.  1 2:17;  see  esp.  Bruce  J.  Malina,  The  Palestinian  Manna  Tradition  (Leiden: 
Brill,  1968). 

35  Deut.  8:3;  Isa.  55:10-11;  Sir.  15:3;  Wis.  16:20,  26;  Gen.  Rah.  70:5  (on  Gen.  28:20), 
which  quotes  Prov.  9:5.  The  midrash  on  Ex.  16:4  combines  God’s  promise  of  the  “bread 
from  heaven”  with  the  invitation  of  wisdom  to  “Come,  eat  of  my  bread,”  found  in  Prov.  9:5, 
thus  at  least  insinuating  the  identification  of  manna  and  wisdom.  In  more  than  one  place, 
Philo  allegorizes  the  manna  as  the  divine  gift  of  wisdom;  see  Mat.  44  §§259-260;  Her.  39 
§ 1 9 1 - 

36  The  extravagant  provision  for  the  5000  calls  to  mind  promises  of  the  messianic  age,  and 
the  feeding  itself  suggests  the  return  of  the  treasury  of  manna  from  on  high  in  the  age  to 
come  (2  Ap.  Bar  29:6-30;  1 En.  10:19).  bee  Bertil  Gartner,  John  6 and  the  Jewish  Passover, 
ConNT  17  (Lund:  Gleerup,  1959),  14-20;  Brown,  John,  1:265;  Malina,  The  Palestinian 
Manna  Tradition,  91-93;  Hengel,  “The  Dionysiac  Messiah,”  in  Studies  in  Early  Christology, 
315-16. 


272 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


come  to  its  fullness.  Eschatology  inevitably  assumes  some  discontinuity 
between  past  and  present,  or  present  and  future.  But  the  discontinuity  does 
not  eradicate  all  continuity,  because  the  eschatological  activity  is  always 
ultimately  lodged  in  the  one  life-giving  God.  Just  as  Israel’s  God  is  one  God, 
so  the  life-giving  work  of  God  is  one  story.  In  John  6,  then,  the  emphasis  falls 
first  on  the  continuity  of  the  narrative  of  God’s  redeeming  work  from  Moses 
to  Jesus,  and  then  on  the  discontinuity  brought  about  by  the  striking  of  the 
eschatological  hour.  Consequently,  to  assert  that  in  Jesus’  presence  all  Jewish 
festivals  lose  their  meaning  is  to  misinterpret  the  character  of  Johannine 
polemic.  Jesus  does  not  replace  the  Jewish  festivals,  and  neither  does  God’s 
deliverance  “replace”  the  deliverance  of  the  exodus  from  Egypt.  Rather,  the 
festivals  of  Israel,  which  present  and  re-present  that  narrative  of  God’s  saving 
wrork,  are  taken  up  into  those  Christian  festivals  which  celebrate  the 
continuation  of  that  narrative.  More  sharply  than  in  the  Synoptics,  the 
interpretation  of  the  Lord’s  Supper  in  John  finds  its  meaning  in  Israel’s 
Passover. 

The  Living  God  and  the  Polemic  Regarding  Idolatry 

We  have  looked  briefly  at  temple  and  Passover  and  the  polemic  associated 
with  them  in  the  Fourth  Gospel,  themes  which  aptly  illustrate  Barrett’s  point 
that  the  Gospel’s  “christocentricity  is  theocentric.”  For  if  Jesus  is  indeed  the 
true  temple,  what  is  at  stake  is  God’s  presence,  glory,  and  dwelling  in  him;  and 
if  he  is  the  living  bread  of  heaven,  it  is  God  who  provides  it.  The  more  that  is 
at  stake  in  the  christological  symbol,  the  more  dependent  it  is  upon  a 
theological  framework.  This  point  is  further  made  by  the  Gospel’s  use  of  the 
phrase  the  “living  God,”  in  its  argument  for  understanding  the  manifestation 
and  worship  of  God  in  and  through  Jesus.  As  noted  earlier,  the  epithet  “living 
God”  was  often  used  in  biblical  and  post-biblical  polemic  in  attacks  on  pagan 
idol  worship.  But  it  is  once  again  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  which  show'  how  that 
same  basic  polemic  could  be  used  against  one’s  own  fellow  Jews.  The  Rule  of 
the  Community , for  example,  dictates  that  the  priests  and  Levites  shall 
pronounce  this  curse:  “Cursed  by  the  idols  which  his  heart  reveres,  is  the  one 
who  enters  this  covenant  leaving  his  guilty  obstacle  in  front  of  himself  to  fall 
over  it”  (iQS  2:11-12).  Those  of  the  lot  of  Belial  stray  “from  following  God 
on  account  of  [their]  idols”  (iQS  2:16-17).  Again  the  document  speaks  of  the 
spirit  within  the  sons  of  truth  which  “detests  all  unclean  idols”  (iQS  4:5). 
Those  outside  the  covenant  community  are  said  to  stray  from  following  God 
(2:16);  they  will  be  consumed  with  “everlasting  destruction”  (2:15).  Such  a 
one  “will  not  become  clean  by  the  acts  of  atonement . . . Defiled,  defiled  shall 


273 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN 

he  be  all  the  days  he  spurns  the  decrees  of  God.”  We  have  here  traditional 
polemic  against  idol  worship  applied  to  those  who  do  not  adhere  to  the  ways 
and  customs  of  the  Community  (but  cf.  i iQTemple  2.1-15,  62.13-16).  Such 
polemic  is  even  used  against  would-be  members  of  the  community,  whose 
insincerity  and  lack  of  genuine  repentance  prohibit  them  from  becoming  true 
members  of  the  community.  And  yet  while  the  Scrolls  speak  of  these  fellow 
Israelites  as  “sons  of  darkness”  and  as  belonging  to  the  lot  of  Belial,  and  speak 
of  their  sins  in  terms  of  idolatry,  nevertheless  the  same  Scrolls  do  not  rouse 
these  so-called  “apostates”  to  worship  the  living  God.  The  Qumran  commu- 
nity may  have  summoned  fellow  Israelites  to  appropriate  ways  of  worshiping 
God,  and  to  membership  within  the  holy  community,  but  they  do  not  need  to 
argue  about  the  proper  object  of  worship,  which  can  be  taken  for  granted. 
Whatever  else  they  may  be,  fellow  Israelites  are  not  crass  idolaters. 

By  the  time  of  the  writing  of  the  New  Testament,  “the  living  God”  had 
become  a standard  designation  for  God  (Mt.  26:63;  Heb-  3:12;  9:14;  10:31; 
12:22;  16:16).  There  is  but  one  explicit  parallel  in  the  Fourth  Gospel,  in  the 
epithet  the  “living  Father”  (6:57).  The  reason  for  its  absence  is  near  to  hand: 
the  term  “living  God”  generally  occurs  in  either  polemical  contexts,  in  attacks 
on  the  worship  of  false  gods  or  the  idols  of  pagans,  or  in  paraenetic  contexts  to 
encourage  gentile  converts  to  hold  fast  to  the  one  true  God.  John’s  Gospel 
lacks  such  an  emphasis  because  its  argument  is  neither  a polemic  against 
idolatry  nor  an  exhortation  against  turning  back  to  paganism. 

Within  the  Gospel  of  John,  the  commonplace  that  God  is  the  living  or 
life-giving  God,  functions  as  a warrant  for  claims  about  the  life-giving  work  of 
Jesus.  Particularly  in  chapter  five,  with  the  healing  of  the  man  at  the  pool  in 
Jerusalem  on  the  Sabbath  day,  Jesus  is  presented  as  arguing  that  he  works  even 
as  God  works:  that  is,  he  does  the  life-giving  work  reserved  for  God  on  the 
Sabbath  day.  This  declaration  alludes  to  the  argument— found,  for  example, 
in  Philo  and  rabbinic  writings  — that  although  God  ceased  creative  work  on 
the  Sabbath,  God  did  not  cease  from  work  that  sustained  the  creation. 37  Even 
on  the  Sabbath,  God  gives  life  to  the  world.  Thus,  says  Jesus,  “My  Father  is 
working  and  I am  working  still.”  It  is  the  character  and  prerogative  of  God 
alone  to  give  life,  but  Jesus  exercises  those  powers  as  he  bestows  life.  To  some 
extent,  then,  it  can  be  said  that  whereas  the  Synoptic  Gospels  present  Jesus  as 
justifying  violations  of  Sabbath  law,  the  Fourth  Gospel  actually  presents  Jesus 
as  keeping  the  Sabbath  — but  keeping  it  as  God  keeps  it,  by  engaging  in 

v See  the  discussion  and  references  in  C.  H.  Dodd,  The  Interpretation  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(Cambridge,  UK:  University  Press  1965),  320-23;  Barrett,  The  Gospel  of  According  to  St. 
John,  256. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


2 74 

properly  divine  life-giving  work.  Thus,  this  discourse,  which  argues  that  Jesus 
exercises  God’s  prerogative  to  give  life,  does  so  by  defending  the  Son’s 
dependence  and  obedience  on  the  Father:  “the  Son  can  do  nothing  on  his 
own”  (5:19).  The  argument  for  the  Son’s  dependence  on  the  Father  is  an 
argument  for  the  unity  of  their  work.  Ultimately  it  is  an  argument  for  the 
unity  of  God. 

The  assertion  that  God  gives  life  through  Jesus  resonates  with  those  Jewish 
texts  which  argue  against  idolatry  on  the  grounds  that  such  worship  confuses 
the  Creator,  the  giver  of  life,  with  that  which  is  mortal,  and  worships  that 
which  was  created  by  human  hands  rather  than  that  which  is  uncreated.  Not 
surprisingly,  from  the  very  beginning  of  the  Gospel,  the  Logos,  incarnate  as 
Jesus  of  Nazareth,  is  aligned  with  the  life-giving  Creator:  “All  things  were 
made  through  him”  (1:3);  “in  him  was  life”  (1:4);  “the  world  was  made 
through  him”  (1:10).  The  Word  is  the  means  through  which  God  created  life. 
Not  only  so,  but  the  Word  participates  in  or  partakes  of  the  unique  life-giving 
powers  of  God  in  an  unparalleled  manner:  “Just  as  the  Father  has  life  in 
himself,  so  he  has  granted  to  the  Son  to  have  life  in  himself’  (5:26).  Clearly, 
the  Gospel  predicates  life-giving  powers  of  Jesus  not  simply  to  attribute  to 
him  the  highest  possible  status,  but  also  to  show  the  necessary  unity  of  the 
work  of  Jesus  and  God  in  giving  life,  and  to  align  itself  with  monotheistic 
faith,  which  assumes  the  unity  of  the  creation  and  its  source  in  the  One  God. 
Just  as  we  earlier  argued  that  the  Fourth  Gospel’s  treatments  of  festivals 
indicates  not  that  Jesus  somehow  “replaces”  them,  but  that  he  is  the  locus  and 
mode  of  God’s  presence,  and  also  of  the  worship  of  God,  so  here  we  see  that 
Jesus  becomes  the  agent  and  mode  of  God’s  life-giving  work.  This  theological 
point  has  the  most  far-reaching  implications  for  re-centering  the  worship  of 
God. 


III.  Summary:  The  Worship  of  God  in  the  Fourth  Gospel 

The  argument  in  the  Fourth  Gospel  about  true  worship  of  God  stands 
somewhere  between  the  extremes  found  in  Jewish  polemic.  No  charge  of 
idolatry  or  blasphemy  is  leveled  by  the  Gospel  against  “the  Jews.”!8 
Furthermore,  neither  of  the  two  charges  leveled  against  idolaters  — that  they 
worship  that  which  is  made  by  human  hands,  and  that  they  exchange  the 
created  for  the  Creator— characterizes  John’s  argument  regarding  the  “true 
worship”  of  God.  Nor,  for  that  matter,  is  such  rhetoric  apparently  typical  of 


38  The  charge  of  blasphemy  is,  of  course,  leveled  against  Jesus  by  the  Jews;  5:18;  10:32-39; 
I9:7- 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN 


275 


the  Jews’  criticisms  of  Jesus  and  his  followers.  The  Gospel’s  only  censure 
pertaining  to  the  means,  mode,  or  place  of  worship  as  wrell  to  the  object  of 
worship,  is  leveled  against  the  Samaritans  who  worship  “what  they  do  not 
know.”  Jews,  by  contrast,  worship  “what  [they]  know.” 

In  short,  the  polemic  of  the  Gospel,  particularly  as  it  has  to  do  with 
worship,  depends  on  the  fact  that  it  can  be  assumed  that  Jesus  and  his 
adversaries  are  talking  about  the  same  God,  but  that  they  differ  over  how  and 
where  God’s  presence  is  manifested  and  what  that  implies  for  the  worship  of 
God.  The  Gospel  assumes  that  God’s  presence  is  manifested  in  the  temple  — 
now,  however,  re-construed  as  Jesus  himself,  wrho  is  remembered  in  the 
Christian  “Passover”  as  the  life-giving  bread.  Therefore,  John  argues  that 
worship  ought  to  be  directed  to  God  in  the  realm  of  that  temple,  in  ways 
which  remember  the  deeds  of  God  through  Jesus,  and  by  directing  honor  to 
the  one  who  gives  life  through  Jesus.  While  the  Fourth  Gospel  speaks 
absolutely— the  Jews  of  the  Fourth  Gospel  have  never  seen  God,  have  never 
heard  God,  and  have  never  known  God  — these  absolute  statements  mask  the 
extensive  common  ground  between  Jesus  and  “the  Jewrs.”39 

This  common  ground  is  only  further  mapped  when  we  observe  that, 
according  to  John,  Jesus’  own  disciples  have  never  seen  God  either.  In  fact,  no 
one  in  the  Gospel  sees  God  — except  the  Son,  who  makes  him  known  (1:18; 
6:45-46).  Because  Jesus  is  primarily  the  means,  mode,  and  place  of  divine 
revelation,  to  “see  him”  is  to  “see  the  Father,”  an  assertion  which  in  no  way 
predicates  an  identity  of,  or  equivalence  between,  these  two  figures,  but  rather 
assumes  the  comprehensive  revelatory  role  of  the  Son.  The  images  used  to 
interpret  his  significance  focus  on  Jesus’  role  as  the  means  of  revelation  and 
salvation  (e.g.,  wisdom,  word,  lamb,  bread,  light);  on  his  role  as  the  place  or 
locale  of  revelation  (the  heavenly  ladder,  the  temple);  or,  on  various  agents  (e.g., 
Moses,  Messiah,  Son  of  Man,  the  Prophet)  who  mediated  the  message  and 
judgments  of  God  to  the  people.  Together  these  images  conflate  the  roles  of 
the  mediator,  the  agent,  and  the  means  through  which  God  is  made  known 
and  manifested,  in  the  person  of  Jesus.  Never  do  these  means  or  intermediary 
figures  take  the  place  of  God:  the  temple  is  not  worshiped;  Moses  and  the 
Prophet  are  commissioned  and  empowered  by  God;  and,  w hile  wisdom  and 
word  may  impart  God’s  very  thought,  they  are  always  explicitly  expressions 
derived  from  God. 

The  concentration  of  all  these  revelatory  entities  in  the  person  of  Jesus  is  an 


39  D.  E.  Aune  comments,  “Though  Christians  worship  the  same  God  as  Jews,  the  role  of 
Christ  in  defining  God  is  an  essential  and  distinctive  feature  of  Christian  worship.”  Anchor 
Bible  Dictionary,  s.v.  “Worship,  Early  Christian.” 


2-j6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


argument  for  the  singularity  and  unity  of  the  mediator  and,  hence,  an 
argument  for  the  unity  of  God.  Even  as  Philo  and  Josephus  ground  the 
universal  demand  for  worship  of  God  in  the  unity  of  the  one  true  God,  so 
John  grounds  the  all-encompassing  role  of  Jesus’  mediating  work  in  the  unity 
of  God.  Means,  place,  and  time  of  revelation  come  together  in  the  person  of 
Jesus,  and  the  concentration  of  all  these  functions  in  the  person  of  Jesus 
depends  upon  the  assumption  of  the  unity  of  God.  The  fundamental 
assumption  of  the  unity  of  God  is  thus  ultimately  the  basis  for  the  argument 
that  the  presence  of  God  is  manifested  fully  in  Jesus,  and  that  the  life  which 
Jesus  offers  is  the  very  life  of  God.  Such  an  argument  is  comparable  to,  if  not 
directly  derived  from,  the  Jewish  arguments  for  one  temple  as  fitting  for  the 
worship  of  the  one  God. 

To  see  Jesus  as  the  means  of  genuine  worship  in  the  Fourth  Gospel  is  one 
aspect  of  John’s  “agency  Christology,”  and  coheres  with  those  christological 
affirmations  which  designate  him  as  “the  Word”  and  Son  of  God,  which 
speak  of  his  union  with  and  dependence  on  God,  and  which  argue  that  he 
manifests  God’s  glory.  All  these  formulations  underscore  Jesus’  role  as  the 
means  of  revelation  and  salvation.  Such  arguments  also  provide  the  basis  for 
what  Christians  came  to  understand  as  the  Trinity.  Consistent  with  other 
formulations  in  the  New  Testament,  the  Son  is  the  means  of  creation,  the 
means  of  revelation,  the  means  of  God’s  manifestation  and  presence.  Because 
the  Son  is  the  means  through  which  the  one  God  creates  the  world,  so  he  is 
also  the  comprehensive  “means”  through  which  worship  is  to  be  offered  to 
the  one  true  and  living  God. 

Popular  misconceptions  notwithstanding,  trinitarian  formulas  arise  not 
from  somehow  “elevating”  Jesus  to  the  status  of  divinity,  as  though  the 
problem  were  getting  him  “high”  enough,  and  as  though  the  ultimate 
christological  question  was  “how  high  is  he?”  Rather,  trinitarian  formulations 
rest  ultimately  on  those  statements  which  affirm  the  comprehensive  manifes- 
tation of  God  through  and  in  the  Son.  Even  the  distinctive  Johannine 
confession  of  the  Word  as  “God”  does  not  lead  to  a different  conclusion,  for 
the  designation  of  the  Word  as  “God”  likely  points,  as  it  does  in  Philo,  to  the 
way  in  which  the  unseen  God  is  nevertheless  genuinely  manifested  or  “seen” 
as  the  “Logos.”  The  Logos  is  the  visible  manifestation  of  deity.  In  like 
manner,  the  Fourth  Gospel  asserts  that  God  cannot  be  seen  — not  by  anyone, 
except  the  Son,  who  has  made  him  known  and  who  himself  reveals,  manifests, 
and  embodies  the  Father.  In  that  sense,  he  is  truly  “God.”  The  issue  is  not 
whether  he  is  “equal”  to  God  in  the  sense  of  sharing  the  essence  or  having  as 
high  a status,  but  whether  his  deeds  and  life  genuinely  and  comprehensively 


WORSHIP  IN  JOHN  277 

mediate  the  life  of  God.  Thus,  the  charge  that  Jesus  “makes  himself  equal  to 
God”  could  be  dismissed  on  the  grounds  that,  on  the  one  hand,  Jesus  does  not 
make  himself  anything!  But,  on  the  other  hand,  Jesus  is  “equal  to  God”  insofar 
as  and  because  he  mediates  God’s  presence  and  offers  the  very  life  of  God. 
Although  the  emphasis  on  Jesus  as  mediator  is  often  decried  as  a “functional 
Christology,”  this  emphasis  alone  provides  the  basis  for  Trinitarianism  rather 
than  tritheism. 

While  it  may  be  appear  to  be  honoring  to  Jesus,  then,  to  extol  the  Gospel  as 
christocentric,  the  Gospel  itself  demands  that  its  Christology  be  set  within  the 
context  of  theology,  of  thinking  about  God.  The  solution  therefore  is  not  to 
try  to  “strike  a balance”  between  Christology  and  theology,  as  though  these 
were  two  fundamentally  different  or  even  opposing  enterprises  which  one 
needs  to  weigh  somehow  on  the  scales  of  theological  justice.  The  Gospel’s 
theocentricity  can  encompass  its  christocentricity,  but  it  cannot  work  the  other 
way.  I have  tried  to  argue  tonight  that  in  the  Fourth  Gospel  it  does  not  work 
the  other  way. 

At  the  outset  of  this  lecture,  I suggested  that  a close  reading  of  selected 
relevant  passages  would  lead  to  greater  exegetical  precision  about  the 
Gospel’s  treatment  of  such  themes  and  institutions  as  purity,  the  temple,  and 
Passover.  Such  precision  would  show  that  the  Fourth  Gospel  does  not  reject 
any  of  these  Jewish  practices  and  institutions  out  of  hand.  Rather,  they  are 
encompassed  by  means  of  the  /Geological  assumption  that  in  the  eschatological 
hour  God’s  presence  and  salvation  are  manifested  through  Jesus,  the  Messiah 
of  Israel,  through  whom  God  brings  Israel’s  hopes  to  fullness.  On  this  reading 
of  the  Gospel,  we  would  be  led  to  rethink  some  commonly  held  assumptions 
about  the  Fourth  Gospel,  including  the  assumption  that  the  Gospel  repudi- 
ates Jewish  institutions  and  practices  by  means  of  its  “replacement  theology,” 
an  assumption  which  seems  to  have  become  virtually  axiomatic  in  Johannine 
studies  today.  We  would  also  be  led  to  rethink  the  assumption  that  the  Gospel 
is  “christocentric”  and  be  forced  to  abandon  that  characterization  as  a grid  by 
which  exegetical  conclusions  are  predetermined. 

Finally,  we  return  to  the  quotations  from  C.  K.  Barrett,  with  which  I began: 
“There  can  be  no  doubt  then  that  for  John  the  historical  figure  of  Jesus  was 
central  for  his  understanding  of  God;  central,  but  not  final.  . . . There  could 
hardly  be  a more  Christocentric  writer  than  John,  yet  his  very  Christocentric- 
ity is  theocentric.”  Such  formulations  are  not  merely  another  instance  of  the 
scholarly  predilection  for  slicing  hairs  ever  thinner.  Rather,  they  get  at 
something  crucial  to  the  Gospel,  namely,  that  the  Gospel  is  “writing  about, 


278 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


and  directing  our  attention  to,  God. ”4°  Far  from  demoting  Jesus,  the 
argument  for  theocentricity  rather  raises  the  stakes.  The  threat  of  John’s 
Gospel  came  not  because  he  had  excavated  a broad  ugly  ditch  between  Jesus 
and  Judaism,  or  between  church  and  synagogue  — but  because  in  portraying 
Jesus  as  the  manifestation  of  the  presence  of  God,  he  surely  drew  a line  in  the 
sand. 


4°  Barrett,  “Christocentric  or  Theocentric?”  363.  See  also  the  comments  by  Dermot 
Lane,  The  Reality  of  Jesus:  An  Essay  in  Christology  (Dublin:  Veritas,  1975),  142:  “1  he  ultimate 
purpose  of  christology  is  to  illuminate  our  experience  and  understanding  of  the  mystery  of 
God.  Christology  if  it  is  to  achieve  this  goal  must  be  theocentric.” 


Faith  and  Identity  in 
Nisei  Self-Narratives* 

by  Peter  Yuichi  Clark 


AMONG  the  many  diverse  populations  currently  described  by  the  umbrella 
term  “Asian  Pacific  American”  are  almost  848,000  Japanese  Americans 
(about  0.3%  of  the  total  United  States  population).  This  group  has  been 
represented  in  the  U.S.  in  large  numbers  since  the  1890s,  and  their  history — 
like  that  of  many  other  minority  groups  — is  one  of  community"  building  and  a 
striving  to  claim  civil  rights  guaranteed  under  the  constitution,  despite  many 
incidents  of  racial  prejudice  and  institutionalized  discrimination.  This  particu- 
lar population,  which  endured  a long  internment  by  the  federal  government 
during  the  Second  World  War,  identifies  itself  by  using  generational  catego- 
ries (Issei  for  first-generation  immigrants,  Nisei  for  their  children,  Sansei  for 
their  grandchildren,  and  so  on).  Because  many  of  the  Nisei  spent  their 
childhood  or  early  adulthood  as  internees,  their  experience  as  U.S.  citizens  is 
distinctive  and  yet  can  inform  us  about  Asian-Pacific-American  identity, 
culture,  society,  and  faith.  In  this  chapter  we  will  look  at  the  recollections  of  a 
particular  group  of  Nisei  who  embraced  the  Christian  faith  and  discover  three 
themes  that  undergird  their  religious  experience:  the  centrality  of  a diaspora 
community,  the  nurturing  of  endurance  in  suffering,  and  a conviction  of 
divine  Providence  viewed  through  a Japanese  cultural  lens.  These  themes  are 
interwoven  in  a way  that  reiterates  the  predominantly  communal  focus  of 
Nikkei  [Japanese  Americans]  as  well  as  of  other  Asian-Pacific-American 
ethnic  groups.  Furthermore,  from  a developmental-psychosocial  perspective, 
the  spiritual  journeys  of  these  Nisei  illustrate  some  of  the  rhythmic  tension 
that  psychologist  Erik  Erikson  theorizes  is  characteristic  of  people’s  aging 


The  Rev.  Peter  Yuichi  Clark  is  a doctoral 
candidate  at  Emory  University  in  Atlanta , 
Georgia , and  General  Staff  Support  Chap- 
lain at  Emory  University  Hospital.  He 
delivered  this  lecture , here  revised  for  pub- 
lication, on  February  19,  199 7,  at  Prince- 
ton Theological  Seminary , to  mark  the 
fifty-fifth  anniversary  of  the  signing  of 
Executive  Order  9066  by  President  Fran- 
klin D.  Roosevelt,  authorizing  the  removal 
of  over  100,000  persons  of  Japanese  ances- 
try to  internment  camps  and  relocation 
centers. 


* I am  grateful  to  Timothy  S.  Tseng,  Sang  Hyun  Lee,  Henry  Leathern  Rietz,  Mari 
Kim-Shinn,  Andrew  Wertheimer,  and  David  Yoo  for  their  support  and  my  colleagues  in 
the  Emory  University  Graduate  School  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  Department  of  Person, 
Community,  and  Religious  Practices,  for  their  suggestions  on  earlier  drafts  of  this  essay. 


280 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


years  — dancing  between  endurance  and  resistance  and  fatalism  and  hope,  or 
as  Erikson  himself  phrases  it,  “integrity  versus  despair.” 

Broadening  our  focus,  I believe  these  Nisei’s  stories  tell  us  something  about 
how  religious  affiliation  and  commitment  can  serve  as  a sustaining  and 
(potentially)  transforming  influence  in  Asian-Pacific-American  people’s  lives, 
especially  when  experiencing  oppressive  situations,  and  they  tell  us  something 
about  how  Asian-Pacific-American  communities  preserve  their  history  and 
culture.  To  hear  these  insights,  though,  requires  us  to  pay  attention  to  the  way 
that  these  people  tell  their  stories;  we  must  be  sensitive  to  how  those 
narratives  express  their  selves  and  to  how  they  affect  us  as  listener-recipients 
of  their  stories.  As  Paul  Ricoeur  reminds  us,  narratives  structure  time  and 
make  it  human;  so  we  will  seek  to  share  their  lives-in-time  and,  I hope, 
thereby  experience  an  ensouled  encounter. 

The  stories  on  which  we  will  focus  here  are  the  self-narratives  of  Japanese 
Americans  interviewed  by  the  Nisei  Christian  Oral  History  Project  between 
1981  and  1990.  This  project,  undertaken  for  the  Northern  California  Japa- 
nese Christian  Church  Federation  (NCHOP,  known  colloquially  as  the 
Dome!)  and  the  Japanese  Presbyterian  Conference,  has  collected  currently 
over  200  oral  histories  of  elderly  Nisei  and  has  presented  edited  transcriptions 
of  thirteen  such  narratives  in  two  volumes  entitled  Nisei  Christian  Journey : Its 
Promise  and  Fulfillment d For  several  reasons,  these  narratives  should  not  be 
construed  as  offering  a representative  sample  of  Nisei.  The  participants  were 
all  members  of  mainline  Protestant  congregations  in  northern  California,  and 
many  of  them  were  recommended  to  the  NCOHP  committee  for  interview- 
ing. All  of  the  participants  were  retired  from  their  vocational  careers,  and 
most  of  these  people  had  been  involved  in  either  the  petit-bourgeois  eco- 
nomic niche  or  the  human-service  professions.  The  committee  edited  the 
interviews  for  publication,  deleting  references  with  unflattering  (or  poten- 
tially libelous)  overtones  about  living  persons,  but  it  is  unclear  what  else  has 
been  omitted.  Further,  certain  aspects  of  the  data  gathering  process  are  not 
explained  in  the  text:  for  example,  the  interviews  were  structured  to  elicit 
chronologically  driven  narratives,  and  they  were  conducted  in  English  by  one 
of  eight  interviewers,  who  were  usually  known  by  the  participants.  Neverthe- 
less, while  it  appears  that  these  interviews  were  gathered  and  selected  without 
adhering  to  strict  ethnographic  methods,  I believe  that  through  a qualitative 
content  analysis  they  can  offer  us  valuable  insights  about  the  life  events, 

1 Nisei  Christian  Oral  History  Project,  Nisei  Christian  Journey:  Its  Promise  and  Fulfillment , 
2 vols.  (Monterey:  Japanese  Presbyterian  Conference  and  the  Northern  California  Japanese 
Christian  Church  Federation,  1988,  1991).  Subsequent  references  to  these  hooks  will  use 
the  abbreviations  “NCJi”  and  “NCJ2”  and  page  numbers. 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF-NARRATIVES  281 


sociopolitical  settings,  and  relational  constellations  of  Japanese  people  in 
America. 

For  many  of  the  interviewees,  their  early  childhood  was  marked  by  the 
awareness  that  they  were  seen  as  different  because  of  their  ethnic  origin.  The 
awareness  emerged  through  a variety  of  events,  some  rather  simple  and  stark. 
Koji  Murata,1 2  for  example,  remembers  that 

The  YMCA,  even  though  it  was  a Christian  organization,  did  not  allow  the 
Japanese  to  swim  in  the  pool.  They  finally  set  aside  a special  time  for  us.  I 
think  it  was  before  7:00  a.m.  and  after  9:00  p.m.  on  Saturday  nights.  We 
used  to  go  because  we  loved  to  swim.  I remember  swimming  in  the  YMCA 
pool  Saturday  nights  and  as  they  started  to  drain  the  water,  the  water  would 
go  down.  We  didn’t  think  of  it  as  being  discriminated  against.  We  thought, 
“Wow,  what  a break  to  go  swimming  at  the  Y!”  (NCJ2,  127) 

Rhoda  Akiko  Iyoya  recalls  another  incident  involving  her  Depression-era 
school: 

I remember  school  plays  and  especially  the  school  pageants.  In  those  days 
they  did  the  Christmas  plays  in  schools,  the  whole  nativity  scene  and 
everything.  For  the  angels  they  would  pick  the  blonde,  blue-eyed  girls  and  I 
always  wished  I could  be  an  angel,  but  I knew  I never  could  be  one  because  I 
was  not  blonde  and  blue-eyed.  I accepted  it  in  the  end.  (NCJ2,  15) 

Both  tell  these  stories  without  much  rancor.  Yet,  it  is  intriguing  to  note  that 
both  of  these  people  would  recall  incidents  of  discrimination  in  which 
Christian  symbols  and  institutions  figured  prominently.  As  we  will  see  later, 
this  may  underscore  the  power  of  organized  religious  expressions  as  a 
legitimating  force  in  society. 

Experiencing  racial  discrimination,  and  adapting  to  its  presence  and  effects, 
thus  became  a way  of  life  for  Japanese  Americans  as  it  had  for  other 
minorities.  With  the  surprise  bombing  of  the  U.S.  Navy  base  at  Pearl  Harbor 
on  December  7,  1941,  both  Issei  and  Nisei  feared  that  the  racism  would 
intensify,  that  they  would  be  blamed,  that  they  would  be  harmed.  All  of  the 
participants  remembered  where  they  were  that  morning— in  a manner  similar 
to  recollections  of  the  day  that  John  F.  Kennedy  died  — and  they  reported 
feeling  stunned.  “I  felt  like  somebody  shot  me,”  Ichiro  Yamaguchi  said 
(NCJ2,  80).  Most  Japanese  Americans  began  hearing  reports  of  Nikkei  being 
arrested  and  imprisoned  for  suspected  espionage;  some  took  those  stories 

1 Respondents  in  the  NCOHP  interviews  were  identified  by  their  real  names,  anil  I 

follow  that  practice  in  this  essay  as  well. 


282 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


seriously  and  began  making  preparations.  Osame  Doi  reports  that  “[w]e  were 
in  constant  fear  that  the  FBI  would  raid  our  homes  for  supposed  contraband 
so  Mama  and  Shuki  had  to  dispose  of  any  incriminating  objects.  Looking 
back,  we  had  nothing  to  hide,  but  out  of  fear,  a sword  was  buried  in  the 
backyard”  (NCJi,  7). 

Then  came  the  signing  of  Executive  Order  9066  on  February  19,  1942,  in 
which  President  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt  authorized  the  creation  of  restricted 
military  areas  “from  which  any  or  all  persons  may  be  excluded”  and  ordered 
that  “to  provide  for  residents  of  any  such  area  who  are  excluded  therefrom, 
such  transportation,  food,  shelter,  and  other  accommodations  as  may  be 
necessary.”}  This  order  made  possible  the  forced  evacuation  of  112,000 
Japanese  American  people  (almost  two-thirds  of  whom  were  United  States 
citizens)  from  the  West  Coast  to  sixteen  assembly  centers  and  then  to  ten 
relocation  camps  further  inland. 

For  many  of  these  people,  the  Internment  experience  was  humiliating. 
They  were  assigned  numbers,  loaded  onto  trains,  moved  to  the  camps,  and 
had  to  live  in  hastily  converted  stables  or  drafty  barracks.  There  was  little 
privacy  in  living  quarters  or  at  toilets;  “the  standing  joke,”  Hatsune  Helen 


3 The  full  text  of  the  paragraph  from  which  this  quotation  is  taken  reads  as  follows: 
“Now,  therefore,  by  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  me  as  President  of  the  United  States, 
and  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  Army  and  Navy,  I hereby  authorize  and  direct  the 
Secretary  of  War,  and  the  Military  Commanders  whom  he  may  from  time  to  time 
designate,  whenever  he  or  any  designated  Commander  deems  such  action  necessary  or 
desirable,  to  prescribe  military  areas  in  such  places  and  of  such  extent  as  he  or  the 
appropriate  Military  Commander  may  determine,  from  which  any  or  all  persons  may  be 
excluded,  and  with  respect  to  which,  the  right  of  any  person  to  enter,  remain  in,  or  leave 
shall  be  subject  to  whatever  restrictions  the  Secretary  of  War  or  the  appropriate  Military 
Commander  may  impose  in  his  discretion.  The  Secretary  of  War  is  hereby  authorized  to 
provide  for  residents  of  any  such  area  who  are  excluded  therefrom,  such  transportation, 
food,  shelter,  and  other  accommodations  as  may  be  necessary,  in  the  judgment  of  the 
Secretary  of  War  or  the  said  Military  Commander,  and  until  other  arrangements  are  made, 
to  accomplish  the  purpose  of  this  order.  The  designation  of  military  areas  in  any  region  or 
locality  shall  supersede  designations  of  prohibited  and  restricted  areas  by  the  Attorney 
General  under  the  Proclamations  of  December  7 and  8,  1941,  and  shall  supersede  the 
responsibility  and  authority  of  the  Attorney  General  under  the  said  Proclamations  in 
respect  of  such  prohibited  and  restricted  areas.”  See  the  Federal  Register  7,  no.  38  (February 
25,  1942),  1407.  President  Gerald  Ford  officially  proclaimed  the  order  terminated  on 
February  19,  1976,  the  thirty-fourth  anniversary  of  the  order’s  issuance.  A reproduction  of 
the  original  order  and  other  documents  from  the  Internment  period  are  available  in  Leona 
Hiraoka  and  Ken  Masugi,  editors , Japanese- American  Internment:  The  Bill  of  Rights  in  Crisis, 
portfolio  N61  (Amawalk,  NY:  Golden  Owl,  1994).  For  background  information  on  the 
internment  and  redress  issues,  see  Brian  Niiya,  editor,  Japanese  American  History:  An  A-to-Z 
Reference  from  1868  to  the  Present,  comp.  Japanese  American  National  Museum  (New  York: 
Facts  on  File,  1993);  Ronald  T.  Takalo,  Strangers  from  a Different  Shore:  A Histoiy  of  Asian 
Americans  (New  York:  Little,  Brown,  1989);  and  Roger  Daniels,  Sandra  C.  Taylor,  and 
Harry  H.  L.  Kitano,  eds.,  Japanese  Americans:  From  Relocation  to  Redress,  revised  edition 
(Seattle:  University  of  Washington  Press,  1991). 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF-NARRATIVES  283 

Kitaji  recalls,  “was  if  you  had  to  go  to  the  latrine,  you  bowed  to  people  as  you 
went  to  an  unoccupied  hole”  (NCJ2,  102).  Yet  they  summoned  up  their 
creativity  and  sense  of  community  in  the  camps,  establishing  schools,  churches, 
and  other  support  organizations  to  improve  life  inside  the  fences.  This  does 
not  mean,  however,  that  the  Nisei  simply  accepted  their  lot.  Several  of  the 
participants  reported  feeling  betrayed  by  the  government:  “The  Constitution 
stated  the  way  America  was  supposed  to  be.  I believed  that  America  was 
different,  but  I just  lost  respect  for  the  government  when  it  reacted  the  way  it 
did,”  June  Hisaye  Toshiyuki  declares  (NCJi,  59).  In  one  incident,  Kimi 
Sugiyama  observes,  “Somebody  asked  them  [the  soldiers],  ‘What  are  you  guys 
doing  up  there?’  They  said,  ‘We’re  protecting  you.’  ‘If  you’re  protecting  us, 
aren’t  those  machine  guns  supposed  to  be  facing  outwards,  not  at  us?’  That’s 
when  it  scared  me”  (NCJ2,  68). 

The  humiliation  of  the  internment  provoked  a sense  of  shame,  which  James 
Fowler  defines  as  “the  awareness  of  the  self  as  disclosed  to  others,  or  to  the 
self,  as  being  defective,  lacking,  or  inadequate.”  The  particular  tone  of  shame, 
though,  was  primarily  of  a type  of  ascribed  shame  “due  to  enforced  minority 
status.”1*  During  the  war,  Japanese  Americans  coped  with  this  shame  in  several 
ways.  A few  unsuccessfully  sought  legal  redress  in  the  federal  courts,  as  in 
Hirabayashi  v.  U.S.  (1943)  and  Korematsu  v.  U.S.  (1943,  1944). 5 Many,  like 
June  Toshiyuki,  decided  that  it  was  shikata  ga  nai—a  situation  that  could  not 
be  helped  — and  said,  “OK,  if  this  is  our  lot  then  let’s  make  the  best  of  it” 
(NCJi,  68).  Others,  though,  decided  to  leave  the  camps,  either  to  enlist  in  the 
U.S.  armed  forces  or  to  pursue  their  education  in  the  Midwest  or  on  the  East 
Coast,  once  these  became  possibilities.  Yet  those  who  left  did  so  with  a 
distinct  sense  of  responsibility  to  preserve  the  integrity  of  their  ethnic  group. 
Royal  Louis  Manaka,  who  served  with  the  highly  decorated  (and  frequently 
pummeled)  U.S.  Army’s  442nd  Regimental  Combat  Team  in  Europe,  real- 


* James  W.  Fowler,  Faithful  Change:  The  Personal  and  Public  Challenges  of  Postmodern  Life 
(Nashville:  Abingdon  Press,  1996),  92,  119;  Fumitaka  Matsuoka,  Out  of  Silence:  Emerging 
Themes  in  Asian  American  Churches  (Cleveland:  United  Church  Press,  1995),  102. 

5 Gordon  Kiyoshi  Flirabayashi  was  convicted  in  1942  for  refusing  to  register  for 
evacuation  and  for  curfew  violations;  Fred  I'oyosaburo  Korematsu  was  convicted  in  die 
same  year  for  violating  the  military  order  that  excluded  persons  of  Japanese  ancestry  from 
designated  areas.  Both  cases  were  appealed  to  the  United  States  Supreme  Court,  which 
upheld  the  convictions.  See  Hirabayashi  v.  United  States,  320  U.S.  81  (1943),  and  Korematsu 
v.  United  States,  319  U.S.  432  (1943)  and  323  U.S.  214  (1944);  the  texts  of  these  Supreme 
Court  opinions  are  available  on  the  World  Wide  Web  at  <http://www.findlaw.com/ 
casecode/supreme.htmI>.  Korematsu’s  conviction  was  vacated  in  1983  and  Hirabayashi’s 
convictions  were  vacated  in  1986  and  1988  on  the  granting  of  writs  of  error  coram  nobis 
(literally,  “error  before  us”),  a legal  process  that  can  be  invoked  only  after  defendants  have 
been  convicted  and  released  from  custody  and  only  to  raise  errors  of  fact  that  were 
knowingly  withheld  by  prosecutors  from  judges  and  defense  attorneys. 


284 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ized  that  he  and  his  comrades  were  “the  tip  of  the  arrow”  in  most  of  their 
military  operations,  and  he  feels  that  “the  442nd  was  the  main  factor  in 
making  the  nation  realize  that  the  Japanese  Americans  were  true  American 
citizens”  (NCJi,  83).6  His  service  helped  bring  honor  to  himself  and  his 
community.  This  same  sense  of  dual  motivation  — to  improve  one’s  own  lot 
and  to  advance  the  cause  of  Japanese-American  people— underscores  Osame 
Doi’s  account  of  her  placement  by  the  American  Friends  Sendee  Committee 
at  the  Lankenau  Hospital  School  of  Nursing:  “They  were  willing  to  accept  a 
Japanese  American  student  for  the  first  time.  I was  told  that  if  it  worked  out, 
they  would  accept  others.  There  were  reasons  to  excel,  not  only  for  myself, 
but  for  other  Nisei.  It  was  good  to  see  other  Nisei  in  classes  to  follow” 
(NCJi,  9).  Both  of  these  responses— military  enlistment  and  educational 
advancement— could  be  interpreted  as  ways  of  “saving  face”  and  counteract- 
ing shame  personally  and  on  behalf  of  one’s  community. 

Not  surprisingly,  both  in  this  time  of  crisis  and  in  the  years  that  followed 
the  ending  of  the  war  and  the  closing  of  the  internment  camps,  the  Japanese- 
American  people  turned  to  their  religious  faith  for  strength  and  wisdom. 
Many  Nisei  Protestants  attended  church  services  organized  within  the  camps; 
and  several  participants  remember  encouraging  words  given  by  Caucasian 
clergy  to  them.  Nobuko  Lillian  Omi,  for  example,  remembers  a sermon  by  E. 
Stanley  Jones  in  which  he  used  Isaiah  40:3 1 as  his  text  and  said:  “Don’t  let  this 
experience  destroy  you.  Use  it  like  an  eagle  to  lift  yourselves  up.  The  eagle 
doesn’t  go  against  the  storm  clouds,  it  uses  them  to  rise  higher,  giving  it 
strength  and  this  is  what  you  people  will  have  to  do  so  you  won’t  be 
destroyed”  (NCJi,  100). 7 Koji  Murata  found  comfort  in  another  hakujin 
(literally,  “white”)  minister’s  words:  “He  said,  ‘Instead  of  cursing  the  dark- 
ness, let’s  brighten  the  room  with  candlelights  like  stars  in  the  sky.’  I thought 

6 This  sentiment  can  be  seen  quite  bluntly  in  the  letter  that  an  interned  Japanese  pastor 
wrote  to  one  of  his  parishioners  in  the  army:  “Dear  Nobuo,  You  have  dedicated  yourself  to 
your  country.  It  is  a beautiful  thing.  I am  proud  of  you.  ...  I am  sure  through  your  own 
dedication  you  can  understand  the  great  meaning  of  the  sacrifice  of  Jesus  Christ  on  the 
cross.  He  dedicated  himself  to  the  Kingdom  of  God  just  as  you  have  dedicated  yoursell  to 
the  beautiful  America  that  you  hold  in  your  heart.  ...  I want  you  to  fight  bravely  for  your 
nation  and  for  humanity,  and  if  it  is  necessary,  sacrifice  yourself  for  your  nation  just  as  Jesus 
Christ  did  on  the  cross  for  the  Kingdom  of  God”  (in  Matsuoka,  Out  of  Silence,  24).  This 
intersection  of  ethnic  pride,  Christian  theology,  and  civil  religion  in  America  illustrates 
what  Fumitaka  Matsuoka  calls  the  “strange,  painful,  and  seemingly  contradictory”  efforts 
of  Japanese-American  Christians  to  preserve  their  identity  as  people  of  Japanese  ancestry 
and  as  full  U.S.  citizens. 

i Dr.  Eli  Stanley  Jones  (1884-1973)  was  a Methodist  missionary'  to  India  and  a prolific 
author.  He  founded  the  Christian  Ashram  movement  in  India,  was  a frequent  nominee  for 
the  Nobel  Peace  Prize,  and  served  as  confidant  for  a number  of  world  leaders  including 
Mohandas  Gandhi,  Martin  Niemoller,  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.,  and  — somewhat  ironically, 
under  these  circumstances— Franklin  D.  Roosevelt. 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF-NARRATIVES  285 


that  was  wonderful  that  stars  shine  in  the  darkness  of  the  sky.  He  urged  us  to 
be  like  candles  in  the  darkness,  that  we  be  the  light  bearers”  (NCJ2,  131). 
These  words  of  consolation  and  encouragement  were  indeed  helpful  re- 
sources for  these  Nisei.  Yet  they  also  can  be  heard  in  another  way.  As  Max 
Weber  has  taught  us,  efforts  at  theodicy  serve  not  only  to  bolster  people  in  the 
non-privileged  classes  — in  this  case,  the  interned  Nikkei  — but  also  respond  to 
the  “psychological  need  for  reassurance  as  to  the  legitimacy  or  deservedness 
of  one’s  happiness”  among  those  in  the  privileged  class.8  Thus  these  pastors’ 
religious  affirmations,  while  offered  (no  doubt)  with  good  intentions  by  the 
clergy  and  received  by  these  Nisei  in  the  same  manner,  may  have  reinforced 
the  statuses  held  by  both  groups. 

This  is  not  to  imply  that  religion,  for  the  Nisei,  became  Marx’s  opiate. 
Indeed,  if  we  observe  the  long-range  impact  of  these  people’s  Christian  faith, 
we  perceive  an  opposite  trend  toward  activism  (with  a relentless  drive  for 
survival  as  a distinct  ethnic  group)  which  helped  fuel  the  intense  forty-year 
lobbying  of  the  U.S.  Congress  to  apologize  and  pay  reparations  to  internees, 
culminating  in  the  passage  of  Public  Law  100-383  (the  Civil  Liberties  Act  of 
1 988). 9 The  tenor  of  their  faith  involves  several  features,  of  which  we  will 
briefly  examine  three:  the  centrality  of  community,  their  vision  of  God’s 
presence  amidst  suffering,  and  the  nature  of  divine  Providence. 

The  first  characteristic  of  Japanese-American  Christian  faith  is  its  founda- 
tion in  communal  experience.  Much  has  been  written  about  the  ethnocultural 
propensity  of  Japanese  people  to  identify  themselves  closely  with  groups  such 
as  stem  families,  prefectural  associations,  and  work  teams.10  Yet  in  insisting 
that  one’s  fate  is  interwoven  with  the  community’s,  they  have  learned  that 
“salvation  can  be  achieved  only  with  others”  or,  as  their  Pure  Land  Buddhist 
friends  often  say,  “I  take  refuge  in  the  Sangha ,”  the  community  of  believers.11 


8 Max  Weber,  The  Sociology  of  Religion,  trans.  by  Ephraim  Fischoff  (Boston:  Beacon  Press, 
1963),  107. 

9 Public  Law  100-383  provided  for  individual  reparation  payments  of  $20,000  to  each 
surviving  internee  and  an  education  fund  of  $1.25  billion.  It  was  signed  by  President  Ronald 
Reagan  on  August  10,  1988,  but  the  first  redress  payments  were  not  made  until  October  9, 
1990,  during  the  Bush  Administration.  See  U.S.  Statutes  at  Large  102  (1990),  903-916,  and 
U.S.  Code,  supplement  I,  title  50  appendix,  sections  1989b  to  i989b-9  (1988). 

10  For  example,  see  Chie  Nakane,  Japanese  Society  (Berkeley:  University  of  California 
Press,  1970);  Takeo  Doi,  The  Anatomy  of  Dependence,  rev.  ed.,  trans.  John  Bester  (Tokyo: 
Kodansha,  1981);  Stephen  S.  Fugita  and  David  J.  O’Brien,  Japanese  American  Ethnicity:  The 
Persistence  of  Community  (Seattle:  University  of  Washington  Press,  1991);  and  Sylvia  Junko 
Yanagisako,  Transforming  the  Past:  Tradition  and  Kinship  among  Japanese  Americans  (Stan- 
ford: Stanford  University  Press,  1985). 

11  The  first  quotation  is  from  Paulo  Freire,  Pedagogy  of  the  Oppressed,  trans.  Myra  Bergman 
Ramos  (New  York:  Seabury  Press,  1970),  142;  the  other  is  one  of  the  “Three  Treasures” 
regularly  recited  in  congregational  services  by  believers  in  the  Jodo  Shinshu  Hongwanji-ha 


286 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Faith  survives  only  when  nurtured  with  others.  Rhoda  Iyoya  arrives  at  this 
conclusion  through  her  musings  on  compassion:  “As  we  share  our  lives  with 
others,  they  share  theirs  with  us  and  in  doing  so  we  can  support  each  other. 
That’s  what  we  mean  by  compassion  and  God’s  love  and  God’s  compas- 
sion. . . . Life  wasn’t  meant  to  be  neat  and  perfect.  . . (NCJ2,  32).  Using  less 
explicit  theological  language,  physician  Henry  Hajime  Kazato  approaches  this 
theme  by  talking  about  church:  “The  thing  that  is  very  important  to  me  is  that 
you  get  a feeling  that  it  is  your  church  and  not  just  a church  that  I go  to.  It  is 
the  church  that  I belong  to  and  am  a part  of.  Especially  since  my  folks  are  gone 
now,  the  church  is  in  a sense  a part  of  my  family”  (NCJ2,  50).  The  members  of 
the  community  are  not  perfect— as  Jack  Nishida  phrased  it,  “the  only  person 
who  is  religious  [i.e.,  a “saint”]  is  the  person  in  the  pine  box”  (NCJi, 
127)  — but  they  are  bound  together  in  the  on  (mutual  indebtedness)12  and  amae 
(dependence)'3  of  community  life,  which  for  these  Christians  is  nourished  by 


tradition.  Most  Japanese-American  Buddhists  are  of  this  faith  group,  organized  as  the 
Buddhist  Churches  of  America  on  the  U.S.  mainland.  “I  take  refuge  in  the  Buddha”  (i.e., 
Amida  Buddha,  who  has  promised  to  save  all  sentient  beings)  and  “I  take  refuge  in  the 
Dharrna"  (the  teaching  that  guides  us  toward  birth  in  the  Pure  Land)  are  the  other  two 
affirmations  or  “treasures”  avowed.  For  BCA  liturgical  resources,  see  Carol  J.  Himaka,  ed., 
Shin  Buddhist  Service  Book  (San  Francisco:  Buddhist  Churches  of  America,  1994);  for  a 
recent  and  accessible  introduction  to  Jfodo  Shinshu , see  Kenneth  K.  Tanaka,  Ocean:  An 
Introduction  to  Jodo-Shinshu  Buddhism  in  America:  A Dialogue  with  Buddhists  and  Others 
(Berkeley:  WisdomOcean,  1997). 

12  On  means  “obligation,  kindness,”  and  has  the  connotation  of  “indebtedness.”  In  her 
post-war  study  ofjapanese  culture,  Ruth  Benedict  asserts  that  Japanese  people  feel  that  they 
are  part  of  a vertical  chain  of  on  that  encompasses  many  blessings  from  various  sources:  life 
(from  one’s  parents),  good  fortune  or  a successful  harvest  (from  kami,  gods  or  ancestral 
spirits),  employment  (from  the  company  and  one’s  supervisor),  and  national  peace  and 
prosperity  (from  the  emperor,  the  nation,  the  gods).  On  applies  to  all  and  because  of  its 
nature  cannot  be  fully  repaid;  thus  the  task  of  demonstrating  one’s  gratitude  becomes  a 
perpetual  moral  duty.  Yet  anthropologist  John  Connor  argues  that  Benedict’s  understand- 
ing of  on  is  strongly  affected  by  the  feudalistic  and  authoritarian  climate  of  prewar  Japan, 
and  that  Japanese  Americans  emphasize  external  obligations  and  duties  much  less  than  their 
Japanese  counterparts.  See  Ruth  Benedict,  The  Chrysanthemum  and  the  Sword:  Patterns  of 
Japanese  Culture  (Boston:  Houghton  Mifflin,  1946),  and  John  W.  Connor,  Tradition  and 
Change  in  Three  Generations  of  Japanese  Americans  (Chicago-.  Nelson-Hall,  1977),  107-110. 

'J  Amae  is  the  emotional  tendency  to  presume  on  another’s  love,  a “passive  dependence, 
or  passive  love,  [that]  manifests  itself  in  the  desire  to  be  indulged  by  the  object  of  amae," 
according  to  psychiatrist  Takeo  Doi  in  The  Anatomy  of  Self:  The  Individual  versus  Society, 
trans.  Mark  A.  Harbison  (Tokyo:  Kodansha,  1985),  34.  For  critiques  of  Doi’s  influential 
views,  see  Alan  Roland,  “How  Universal  is  Psychoanalysis?  The  Self  in  India,  Japan,  and  the 
United  States,”  in  Culture  and  Self:  Philosophical  and  Religious  Perspectives,  East  and  West,  ed. 
Douglas  Allen  (New  York:  Westview  Press,  1997),  27-39;  Hisa  A.  Kumagai,  “A  Dissection 
of  Intimacy:  A Study  of  ‘Bipolar  Posturing’  in  Japanese  Social  Interaction—  Amaeni  and 
Amayakasu,  Indulgence  and  Deference,”  Cultural  Medicine  and  Psychiatry  5 (1981):  249-72; 
Takie  Sugiyama  Lebra,  “Self  in  Japanese  Culture,”  in  Japanese  Sense  of  Self,  ed.  Nancy  R. 
Rosenberger  (New  York:  Cambridge  University  Press,  1992),  105-120;  Yasuhiko  Take- 
tomo,  “ Amae  as  Metalanguage:  A Critique  of  Doi’s  Theory  of  Amae,"  Journal  of  the 
American  Academy  of  Psychoanalysis  14  (1986):  525-44;  and  Peter  N.  Dale,  The  Myth  of 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF-NARRATIVES  287 


grace.  This  vision  embraces  not  only  the  Nikkei,  but  also  is  opening  toward 
all,  including  those  who  are  experienced  as  the  oppressors.  In  the  words  of 
Paul  Nagano,  an  American-Baptist  clergyman  who  ministered  in  the  Poston 
relocation  center  and  is  now  director  of  the  Council  for  Pacific  Asian 
Theology, 

We  have  been  placed  in  [an]  internment  camp.  Our  stories  are  full  of 
suffering  and  pain.  And  yet  I am  deeply  convinced  that  we  have  to  go 
beyond  rage,  resentment  and  fear  of  those  who  placed  us  into  such  [a] 
predicament.  We  all  must  live  together. ‘4 

The  imagery  that  seems  most  apt  here  is  that  of  the  Israelite  tribes  being 
taken  into  captivity.  If  we  are  the  people  of  the  diaspora , the  people  scattered 
among  potentially  hostile  strangers  (quite  literally  for  Japanese  Americans, 
since  in  many  cities  after  the  war  they  were  unable  or  unwilling  to  reestablish 
“Japantowns”),  how  do  we.  maintain  our  identity,  our  sense  of  who  we  are? 
The  response  that  these  Nisei  (and  many  other  Asian  Pacific  Americans)  have 
made  is  by  intentional  involvement  in  ethnically-based  social  and  cultural 
institutions,  such  as  the  Domei  churches  and  Pure  Land  Buddhist  temples. '5 
Though  geographically  dispersed,  for  these  people  the  Japanese-American 
Christian  community  affords  them  the  opportunity  to  “sing  the  Lord’s  song 
in  a foreign  land”  (Ps.  137:4)  and  not  forget  “Jerusalem,”  their  ancestry  and 
heritage,  even  as  they  “seek  the  welfare  of  the  city  where  I [God]  have  sent 
you  . . . for  in  its  welfare  you  will  find  your  welfare”  (Jer.  29:7 ).  The  dilemma 
now  facing  Japanese  Americans  and  their  churches  (and  other  Asian  Pacific 


Japanese  Uniqueness  (New  York:  St.  Martin’s  Press,  1986).  See  also  Frank  A.  Johnson’s 
reformulation  of  Doi’s  aniae  theory  in  Dependency  and  Japanese  Socialization:  Psychoanalytic 
and  Anthropological  Investigations  into  Amae  (New  York:  New  York  University  Press,  1993), 
200-206. 

14  Cited  in  Matsuoka,  Out  of  Silence,  1 16.  Cf.  the  argument  made  by  Parker  J.  Palmer  in 
The  Company  of  Strangers:  Christians  and  the  Renewal  of  America's  Public  Life  (New  York: 
Crossroad,  1981). 

'5  This  inference  finds  some  substantiation  in  anecdotal  evidence.  In  my  field  research, 
several  Buddhist  and  Christian  ministers  serving  Japanese-American  congregations  have 
mentioned  to  me  how  Christian  church  members  will  miss  their  regular  worship  service  to 
help  the  Buddhist  temple  with  its  annual  bazaar  (and  vice  versa),  sometimes  with  the 
comment  that  “for  most  of  my  people,  it’s  more  important  to  be  Japanese  American  than  it 
is  to  be  Buddhist  [or  Christian].”  That  comment  would  not  be  true  of  the  NCOHP 
interview  participants,  who  all  profess  strong  commitment  to  their  Christian  faith,  but  it 
does  seem  to  advance  Paul  Spickard’s  point— not  to  mention  Weber,  Troeltsch,  Geertz  and 
others— that  these  religious  institutions  help  to  maintain  a distinct  ethnic  cultural  commu- 
nity and  create,  convey,  or  symbolize  that  shared  culture  to  their  adherents.  See  Paul  R. 
Spickard,  Japanese  Americans:  The  Formation  and  Transformations  of  an  Ethnic  Group  (New 
York  and  London:  Twayne  Publishers  and  Prentice  Hall,  1996),  and  cf.  Brian  Masaru 
Hayashi,  “For  the  Sake  of  Our  Japanese  Brethren”:  Assimilation,  Nationalism,  and  Protestantism 
amongthe  Japanese  of  Los  Angeles,  iSp’p-ipqz  (Stanford:  Stanford  University  Press,  1995). 


288 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Americans  also),  as  Paul  Spickard  has  noted,  is  whether— as  assimilation 
grows  with  successive  generations— these  institutions  can  find  interests  and 
concerns  that  will  attract  people,  elicit  their  participation,  and  help  continue 
and  strengthen  the  unique  ethnicity  that  they  celebrate. 

The  second  theme  involves  the  Nisei’s  understanding  of  God’s  presence 
amid  suffering.  The  Japanese- American  Christians  interviewed  in  the  NCOHP 
project  often  express  not  a desire  to  be  released  from  pain  and  suffering— 
shikata  ga  nai , after  all  — but  rather  a prayer  for  endurance  and  for  an 
awareness  of  God’s  care.  Jack  Nishida  understands  his  grief  over  his  wife’s 
death  by  thinking  about  the  inevitability  of  pain  in  life:  “I  guess  there  is  no 
way  to  avoid  pain  in  life.  Otherwise  we  wouldn’t  be  human  beings.  If  there  was 
no  such  thing  as  pain,  we  wouldn’t  be  human.  We  have  pain  because  we  are 
human  and  pain  is  part  of  being  alive”  (NCJi,  129).  Enduring  the  pain  is 
perceived  by  some  Nisei  Christians  as  part  of  their  faith  journeys,  as  implied 
by  Nobuko  Omi’s  story  of  her  father’s  death:  “Rev.  Kikuchi  just  happened  to 
come  in  as  Papa  was  asking  for  him  and  said,  ‘Mr.  Kadowaki,  this  is  your  cross. 
You  have  to  bear  it.’  ‘Amen,’  my  father  replied  and  clasped  his  hands. 
Accepting  his  cross,  he  died  very  peacefully”  (NCJi,  96).  Even  if  the  suffering 
or  pain  provokes  anger,  there  is  the  sense  among  some  participants  that  such 
anger  cannot  be  expressed  — perhaps  because  of  the  deeply  embedded  Japa- 
nese cultural  value  of  enryo  or  emotional  reserve.16  June  Toshiyuki,  for 
example,  holds  that  all  hardship  has  an  educative  function:  “But  He  [God] 
always  sees  us  through.  It  cannot  be  punishment”  (NCJi,  66).  Rhoda  Iyoya, 
meanwhile,  sounds  afraid  of  either  alienating  God  or  losing  her  faith  in  the 
aftermath  of  her  son’s  suicide:  “My  impulse  was  to  be  angry  at  God  for  having 
this  happen  to  me,  and  yet,  through  my  life  experience  I felt,  if  I’m  angry,  if  I 
turn  away,  what  have  I got?  I’ve  got  nothing!  That’s  really  all  I had.  I was 
stripped  completely  bare.  God’s  presence  was  the  only  thing  I had”  (NCJ2,  3 1). 
Her  voice  echoes  the  ancient  psalmist’s  cry:  “Do  not  cast  me  away  from  your 
presence,  and  do  not  take  your  holy  spirit  from  me”  (Ps.  51:11).  Both  Iyoya 
and  Toshiyuki  express  a vital  belief  of  the  Christian  faidi  — that  because  of 
the  Incarnation  God  knows  our  pain  and  will  not  abandon  us  when  we  suffer. 
Yet  this  tenet,  as  expressed  and  sincerely  felt  by  the  Nisei,  may  well  be  a 
Christian  accretion  on  the  Buddhist-influenced  understanding  that  all  life  is 

16  Enryo  is  a Japanese  word  indicating  polite  restraint,  refusal,  or  modesty  that  has 
overtones  of  social  control  within  the  Japanese- American  community.  It  prevents  a person 
from  demanding  or  expecting  too  much  of  another,  and  it  also  holds  in  check  a person’s 
tendency  to  be  openly  emotional  in  public  settings.  For  a Meadian  discussion  of  the  role 
that  enryo  plays  in  the  Nisei’s  interpersonal  relationships,  see  S.  Frank  Miyamoto,  “Prob- 
lems of  Interpersonal  Style  among  the  Nisei,”  Amerasia  Journal  13  (1986-87):  29-45. 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF -N  A RR  AT  IVES  289 


suffering  and  thus  suffering  is  unavoidable  unless  and  until  enlightenment  is 
realized.17 

The  third  theme  builds  on  the  previous  two  and  is  a response  to  the 
question:  So  what  is  the  relationship  that  these  Christians  enjoy  with  this 
God?  If  Dave  Yutaka  Nakagawa’s  experience  is  typical  of  this  group,  we  might 
find  an  important  clue.  Once  when  working  with  a youth  at  summer  camp,  he 
said:  “I  realized  that  I am  what  I am  because  I know  Christ  as  my  Leader” 
(NCJi,  27).  The  terminology  of  leadership  is  intriguing,  given  the  fact  that 
today  many  Christian  adherents  speak  of  Jesus  as  “Lord”  but  seem  nearly 
oblivious  to  its  governance  connotations.  Using  the  term  “Leader”  restores 
the  metaphor’s  connotative  power  and  elicits  the  speculative  possibility  that 
Nisei  Christians  may  have  constructed  a God-image  akin  to  the  daimyo  of  the 
medieval  samurai  era,  a feudal  authority  who  protects  his  people  and  is 
intimately  related  with  them,  even  when  his  decisions  defy  comprehension  — a 
benevolent,  if  mysterious,  divine  Providence.18  I take  this  path  based  on  the 
suggestive  force  of  the  life  of  Japanese  theologian  Ebina  Danjo  (1856-1937), 
who  began  his  career  as  a samurai  of  the  Yanagawa  fief.  When  feudalism 
collapsed  in  1868,  at  the  birth  of  the  Meiji  Restoration,  he  felt  adrift: 

I had  firmly  decided  to  “offer  up”  my  life  for  him  [the  daimyo\.  However, 

the  Yanagawa  fief  was  lost,  the  castle  burnt,  and  my  young  lord  had  been 

killed.  I felt  terribly  lonely.  Because  the  young  lord  was  dead,  there  was  no 

one  to  whom  I could  offer  my  life,  and  this  was  the  essence  of  my  loneliness. 

To  whom  could  I offer  my  life  after  this? '9 

Thanks  to  an  American  schoolteacher,  Ebina  found  a new  object  of  loyalty  in 
Christ,  a new  daimyo , one  to  whom  he  could  offer  his  life  and  prayers.  My 
suspicion  is  that  these  Nisei  Christians,  their  fiefs  lost  and  casdes  burned  by 
government-endorsed  racism,  turned  with  vigor  (like  Ebina)  toward  their 
divine  dabnyo  for  strength  and  compassion  in  a desperate  time.  Such  an 
identification  with  a charismatic  Leader,  Freud  and  Erikson  both  would 
observe,  reinforces  the  bonds  of  community  one  feels  with  those  others  who 
also  swear  fealty  to  Christ  the  daimyo.10  It  also  allows  believers  to  identify  with 

'7  Cf.  the  argument  of  Shigeo  H.  Kanda  in  “Recovering  Cultural  Symbols:  A Case  for 
Buddhism  in  the  Japanese  American  Communities,”  Journal  of  the  American  Academy  of 
Religion  46  (1978,  supplement):  445-75. 

18  On  God-images  see  Ana-Maria  Rizzuto,  The  Birth  of  the  Living  God:  A Psychoanalytic 
Study  (Chicago:  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1979). 

19  Cited  in  Robert  N.  Bellah,  Beyond  Belief:  Essays  on  Religion  in  a Post-traditionalist  World 
(Berkeley:  University  of  California  Press,  1970),  105. 

20  See  Sigmund  Freud,  Group  Psychology  and  the  Analysis  of  the  Ego  (192 1),  in  The  Standard 
Edition  of  the  Complete  Psychological  Works  of  Sigmund  Freud,  vol.  1 8,  ed.  James  Strachey  et  al. 


290 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


that  Leader’s  vision,  which  in  both  the  Hebrew  Bible  and  the  Gospels  is  a God 
who  champions  the  cause  of  the  downtrodden  and  the  oppressed  and  who 
frees  humans  to  seek  justice  for  themselves  and  their  neighbors.  Thus,  I would 
argue  that  these  Nisei  Christians  not  only  found  comfort  and  assurance  in 
their  theological  tradition,  but  also  (implicit  in  that  tradition)  the  challenge 
and  empowerment  to  resist  the  injustices  they  suffered  and  to  support  the 
redress  effort. 

Given  these  characteristics  of  their  religious  expressions,  it  appears  that 
these  particular  elders  demonstrate  an  intriguing  combination  of  resistance 
and  resignation,  fatalism  and  hope  which  sounds  reminiscent  of  the  psychoso- 
cial tension  described  in  Erikson’s  eighth  developmental  stage  of  integrity 
versus  despair.  For  Erikson,  integrity  involves  “the  acceptance  of  one’s  one 
and  only  life  cycle  and  of  the  people  who  have  become  significant  to  it  as 
something  that  had  to  be  and  that,  by  necessity,  permitted  of  no  substitutions” 
and  that  “an  individual  life  is  the  accidental  coincidence  of  but  one  life  cycle 
with  but  one  segment  of  history,  and  that  for  [the  individual]  all  human 
integrity  stands  and  falls  with  the  one  style  of  integrity  of  which  he  [or  she] 
partakes.”21  For  these  Nisei,  this  aspect  of  integrity  captures  both  their  sense 
that  they  could  not  avoid  having  to  live  through  discrimination  and  the 
internment  (it  was  shikata  ga  nai)  and  their  conviction  that  they  still  could 
decide  how  to  respond  to  their  situation,  and  they  chose  to  do  so  with  faith. 
This  faithful  choice,  made  in  adulthood  and  reflected  upon  in  late  adulthood, 
seems  to  convey  another  aspect  of  Erikson’s  paradigm  — the  interconnected- 
ness of  developmental  crises  and  virtues  with  one  another,  that  “at  the  end  the 
life  cycle  turns  back  on  the  beginnings”  and  mature  faith  is  the  offspring  of 
the  hopefulness  nurtured  in  childhood.22 

The  historical  occurrence  of  the  internment,  and  the  decades  of  institution- 
alized discrimination  that  preceded  and  followed  it,  also  reveals  what  Erikson 
calls  the  human  tendency  to  create  pseudospecies,  the  temptation  to  define 
ourselves  by  considering  “our”  group— by  whatever  parameters  we  measure 
ourselves  — to  be  truly  human  and  other  groups  as  somehow  subhuman.  As 
their  civil  rights  were  violated,  their  belongings  sold,  and  their  families 


(London:  Hogarth  Press  and  the  Institute  of  Psychoanalysis,  1955),  69-143;  and  Erik  H. 
Erikson,  The  Life  Cycle  Completed:  A Review  (New  York:  W.  W.  Norton,  1982),  85-88. 

21  Erikson,  Identity:  Youth  and  Crisis  (New  York:  W.  W.  Norton,  1968),  1 39-140. 

22  Erikson  used  the  phrase  “developmental  crisis”  to  describe  the  various  transitions  that 
he  believed  all  people  must  negotiate  in  order  to  mature  as  human  beings.  By  using  the 
word  “crisis,”  he  is  advocating  a connotation  similar  to  the  pictographs  that  represent  the 
word  in  Chinese:  that  each  developmental  moment  is  significant  and  holds  both  “danger” 
and  “opportunity.”  The  quotation  is  from  The  Life  Cycle  Completed:  A Review  (New  York: 
W.  W.  Norton,  1982),  62. 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF-NARRATIVES  291 


sometimes  separated,  the  Nisei  experienced  some  of  the  effects  of  pseudospe- 
ciation  — highlighted  by  the  fact  that,  while  Executive  Order  9066  could  have 
been  interpreted  so  as  also  to  relocate  German  and  Italian  Americans  (peoples 
who  shared  the  ethnic  heritage  of  many  in  the  majority  culture),  their  mass 
relocation  was  never  attempted.  That  the  Nisei  refused  to  let  this  incident  be 
forgotten  testifies  to  their  tenacity.23  It  also  is  an  invitation  to  the  larger  U.S. 
culture  to  adopt  a more  inclusive  sense  of  identity  wherein  the  national  motto 
e pluribus  unum  could  be  reinterpreted  (as  Fumitaka  Matsuoka  has  done)  to 
mean  not  “out  of  many,  one”  but  rather  “within  one,  many.” 

Having  attended  to  the  life  narratives  of  these  Nisei,  we  must  also  note 
what  we  did  not  hear  in  their  stories.  Aside  from  references  to  “after  the  war,” 
none  of  the  thirteen  people  interviewed  and  published  mentioned  either  the 
Hiroshima  or  Nagasaki  atomic  bomb  blasts.  There  is  a silence  that  hangs  over 
this  topic,  one  that  feels  similar  to  the  silence  that  many  Nisei  have  about  their 
internment  experience. 223  I do  not  know  whether  it  is  actually  due  to  the 
participants’  reticence  or  perhaps  because  of  editing  considerations,  so  any 
assertion  I could  make  will  be  tenuous.  However,  I do  wonder  if  we  are  not 
witnessing  here  an  instance  of  repression  (as  in  Freud),  psychic  numbing  (as  in 
Lifton),  or  a threat  to  integrity  (as  in  Erikson)  in  which  the  fate  that  befell 
their  cousins  in  Japan  is  still  too  painful  to  fully  face,  or  if  perhaps  it  is  that  the 
Nisei  want  so  much  to  be  accepted  as  Americans  that  they  are  reluctant  to 
criticize  overtly  an  action  perceived  by  many  U.S.  citizens  of  their  generation 
as  the  event  that  “ended  the  war.”25 

This  silence,  and  the  various  interpretations  that  can  be  imputed  to  it, 
underscores  an  agenda  that  runs  throughout  these  narratives.  According  to 
the  editors,  the  published  volumes  are  meant  as  a “tribute  to  all  the  Nisei,  and 
in  particular,  the  Nisei  Christians,  and  will  be  of  invaluable  benefit  to  all  who 
read  them”  because  “[e]ach  life  is  a gem  which  reveals  the  struggles  overcome 
and  insights  gained”  (NCJ2,  4-5).  Hence  it  is  easy  to  understand  the  editors’ 


23  One  can  see  this  tenacity  embodied  in  the  internment  camp  reunions  that  many 
Japanese  Americans  attend  faithfully,  as  well  as  in  the  current  fundraising  effort  to  build  a 
National  Japanese  American  Memorial  in  Washington,  DC,  and  the  oral  history  projects 
currendy  under  way  in  several  U.S.  cities. 

24  See  Donna  K.  Nagata,  “The  Japanese  American  Internment:  Exploring  the  Transgen- 
erational  Consequences  of  Traumatic  Stress,”  Journal  of  Traumatic  Stress  3 (1990):  47-69. 

23  See  Freud,  “On  Repression”  (1915),  in  The  Standard  Edition  of  the  Complete  Psychological 
Works  of  Sigmund  Freud , vol.  14,  ed.  James  Strachey  et  al.  (London:  Hogarth  Press  and  the 
Institute  of  Psychoanalysis,  1957),  143-58;  Robert  Jay  Lifton,  Death  in  Life:  Survivors  of 
Hiroshima  (New  York:  Random  House,  1967);  Erikson,  Childhood  and  Society,  2nd  ed.  (New 
York:  W.  W.  Norton,  1963),  247-74;  Erikson,  Joan  M.  Erikson,  and  Helen  Q.  Kivnick, 
Vital  Involvement  in  Old  Age:  The  Experience  of  Old  Age  in  Our  Time  (New  York:  W.  W. 
Norton,  1986),  53-73. 


292 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


hesitancy  to  include  anything  accusatory  from  the  interviews,  and  perhaps  it 
may  explain  why  Hiroshima  is  unmentioned.  For  these  stories  are  meant  to 
convey  both  the  inspiration  and  the  moral  agenda  of  a people,  almost  as  if  to 
say:  “As  we  have  survived  in  the  past,  so  we  will  survive  in  the  future.” 

Yet  the  words  (and  perhaps  the  silence,  too)  do  illustrate  the  challenge  and 
tension  of  beingjapanese  American— with  a major  dimension  of  the  challenge 
involving  the  discernment  of  what  such  an  identity  means.  As  Sylvia  Yanag- 
isako  points  out,  the  Nisei  are  constantly  negotiating  and  compromising 
between  values,  norms,  folk  models  and  cultural  orders  symbolized  by  the 
terms  “Japanese”  and  “American,”  especially  around  issues  of  marriage  and 
kinship  relations.  They  live  with  this  cultural  dissonance  and  they  strive  to 
make  it  creative  and  vital,  defining  and  structuring  their  identities  and  faiths 
in  ways  that  enhance  their  existence  as  individuals  rooted  in  communities. 
Having  said  all  this,  what  can  we  learn  from  the  experience  of  these  older 
Japanese  Americans  that  can  inform  our  understanding  of  present-day  Asian- 
Pacific-American  communities? 

First,  I believe  that  while  the  Nisei’s  history  of  internment  was  and  is 
distinctive,  their  experience  does  bear  some  parallel  to  the  lives  of  people  in 
other  minority  groups.  These  Christians’  style  of  faith  connects  with  other 
“religions  of  the  oppressed,26  I would  suggest,  in  that  there  is  a resonance  in 
the  way  that  oppressed  people  of  faith  respond,  through  a combination  of 
hopeful  endurance  and  resistance.  I believe  that  oppressed  people  of  religious 
conviction,  whether  they  are  Asian  Pacific  American  or  not,  cope  by  employ- 
ing a blend  of  resistance  (either  subtle  or  dramatic)  and  endurance,  and  that 
both  responses  are  necessary  because  they  balance  each  other.  Endurance 
alone  can  collapse  into  complacency  and  despair  (“there’s  nothing  we  can  do 
about  it,  so  we  just  have  to  put  up  with  it”),  as  well  as  the  unconscious 
adoption  of  the  oppressor’s  prejudices  by  the  oppressed.  Resistance  alone  can 
collapse  into  resentment  and  its  own  pseudospeciation:  “They’re  a bunch  of 
racists,  and  we’re  better  off  without  them.”  Paired  together  as  a rhythm  of 
action,  though,  resistance  and  endurance  can  foster  a religious  vision  (and  a 
realistic  hope)  that  the  present,  unjust  circumstances  can  be  survived  and  that, 
further,  they  can  be  changed  toward  the  common  good.  I am  therefore 
asserting  the  power  of  religion  not  only  as  a voice  that  can  legitimate  current 
sociopolitical,  economic,  and  cultural  circumstances,  but  also  as  a sustaining 
influence  that  can  concurrently  empower  people  to  work  toward  transforma- 
tion. 

26  The  phrase  is  Vittorio  Lanternari’s,  from  his  book  of  the  same  title  (New  York:  Alfred 
A.  Knopf,  1963). 


FAITH  AND  IDENTITY  IN  NISEI  SELF-NARRATIVES  293 


Second,  as  Japanese  Americans  have  revealed  an  often  neglected  (or,  until 
recently,  repressed?)  aspect  of  mainstream  American  cultural  history— that  is, 
the  vigor  of  government-sanctioned  institutional  racism  — the  question  arises: 
What  can  these  Nisei  teach  Asian  Pacific  Americans  (and,  indeed,  all  of  us) 
about  creatively  facing  the  issues  of  race  and  ethnicity,  not  to  mention  the 
perils  of  a postmodern  age  in  which  we  wrestle  with  multiple  identities?  One 
such  lesson  can  be  found  in  the  fact  that  these  characteristically  reserved 
Nisei  — “the  quiet  Americans,”  in  Bill  Hosokawa’s  phrase— were  willing  to 
speak  out  and  offer  us  a public  “life  review.”2?  Their  willingness  is  instructive 
of  the  way  in  Asian-Pacific-American  communities  are  primarily  preserving 
their  history  and  culture:  through  “grassroots”  efforts  of  oral  histories,  artistic 
expression28  (witness  the  power,  for  example,  of  Joy  Kogawa’s  novel  Obasan  in 
describing  the  situation  of  Japanese  Canadians  during  the  war),  and  commu- 
nity-mobilized initiatives.  The  academic  discipline  of  Asian-American  studies 
is  quickly  growing  and  assisting  in  this  effort  to  sustain  and  understand  the 
uniquenesses  of  Asian-Pacific-American  ethnic  groups,  but  even  so  it  is  the 
efforts  of  those  communities  themselves  that  will  ensure  the  survival  of  their 
particular  values  and  cultures.  Perhaps  this  awareness  will  help  us  as  Ameri- 
cans to  move  away  from  the  image  of  the  “melting  pot”  and  move  toward  an 
image  of  a “banquet  table,”  with  the  diverse  flavors  of  many  cultures  and 
peoples  to  know  and  to  celebrate,  as  we  each  seek  to  discover  and  claim  the 
heritages  that  help  shape  our  lives,  perspectives,  and  destinies. 


27  The  concept  of  “life  review”  is  from  Robert  N.  Butler’s  seminal  article  “The  Life 
Review:  An  Interpretation  of  Reminiscence  in  the  Aged,”  Psychiatry:  Journal  for  the  Study  of 
Interpersonal  Processes  26  (1963):  65-76. 

28  By  “artistic  expression,”  I do  not  mean  to  imply  only  professionally  created  works.  For 
example,  see  Richard  Chalfen’s  Turning  Leaves:  The  Photograph  Collections  of  Two  Japanese 
American  Fatuities  (Albuquerque:  University  of  New  Mexico  Press,  1991)  for  an  analysis  of 
two  families’  photographic  collections  and  the  impact  that  amateur  family  photography  has 
had  in  preserving  Japanese-American  cultural  history  and  identity. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


Charry,  Ellen  T.  By  the  Renewing  of  You r Minds:  The  Pastoral  Function  of 
Christian  Doctrine.  New  York  and  Oxford:  Oxford  University  Press,  1997.  Pp. 
264.  $45.00. 

Ellen  Charry’s  By  the  Renewing  of  Your  Minds  makes  a striking  contribution 
to  contemporary  theological  discussion.  Since  the  seventeenth  century,  Prot- 
estant theology  has  tended  more  and  more  to  take  its  cues  from  its  cultural 
environment,  seeking  to  show  that  it  is  an  intellectually  legitimate  and 
humanly  useful  discipline  by  standards  that  are  not  necessarily  its  own.  That 
effort  can  hardly  be  considered  a waste  of  time,  but  it  has  all  too  often 
deflected  theology  into  what  might  be  called  second-order  discourse,  i.e., 
discourse  about  itself  (its  methods  of  inquiry,  the  functions  of  its  doctrines,  its 
place  in  the  wider  universe  of  academic  and  human  discourse),  and  away  from 
the  first-order  discourse  in  which  it  talks  not  about  itself  but  about  its  own 
proper  subject  matter.  Charry’s  aim  is  to  open  a way  back  into  such  first-order 
theological  discourse  and,  in  particular,  to  recover  what  she  variously  calls  its 
“pastoral  function,”  its  “salutarity,”  or  its  “aretegenic”  (i.e.,  “virtue- 
shaping”) character.  In  her  use  of  all  of  these  terms,  what  she  has  in  mind  is 
theology’s  root  concern  to  promote  human  excellence  by  shaping  persons  to 
God,  who  is  the  source  and  focal  point  of  true  human  flourishing. 

Charry  pursues  her  purpose  by  means  of  a series  of  brief,  but  penetrating 
historical  studies  that  run  from  the  New  Testament  (Paul  and  his  school,  the 
Gospel  of  Matthew)  through  the  patristic  period  (Athanasius,  Basil  of  Cae- 
sarea, Augustine  of  Hippo)  and  into  the  eras  of  the  Middle  Ages  (Anselm, 
Thomas  Aquinas,  Julian  of  Norwich)  and  the  Reformation  (Calvin).  These 
studies  are  gems  of  careful  and  sensitive  historical  analysis  designed  to  show, 
in  each  case,  how  the  theologian  in  question  shapes  his  or  her  account  of 
God’s  action  on  humanity’s  behalf— understood  as  a gentle  pedagogy  that 
counteracts  the  false  pulls  and  lures  of  misdirected  human  culture  and  teaches 
where  genuine  human  fulfillment  (true  human  excellence)  is  to  be  found— so 
as  to  conform  the  human  self  to  God.  Even  Homer  nods,  of  course;  and  minor 
errors  (e.g.,  on  p.  104,  the  pagan  orator  Libanius  is  labelled  a Christian 
teacher)  or  points  to  quibble  over  (e.g.,  on  p.  143,  it  was  not  because  they 
lacked  the  name  of  Christ  that  Augustine  left  the  Manichees)  occasionally 
intrude.  But  the  far  more  important  point  is  that  Charry  succeeds  in  showing 
how  the  doctrines  elaborated  by  the  theologians  she  studies  fit  into  a common 
pattern:  they  are  “part  of  a concerted  pedagogical  strategy  to  transform  our 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


295 


thinking  by  bringing  us  to  enjoy  God”  (as  she  says  of  St.  Augustine’s 
treatment  of  creation  and  Incarnation,  p.  139).  Here  is  the  “renewing  of  our 
minds”  by  which  we  recognize,  through  God’s  own  action  on  our  behalf,  the 
human  dignity  that  we  have  from  God  and  can  only  attain  in  God,  a true  and 
truly  human  dignity  which  stands  in  sharp  contrast  to  the  false  forms  of 
“dignity”  that  human  culture,  whether  then  or  now,  holds  out  to  tempt  us 
away  from  the  truth  about  ourselves. 

Charry  knows  full  well,  of  course,  that  there  is  no  return  to  the  past,  and  her 
aim  is  by  no  means  merely  to  transport  us  momentarily  back  in  time  to  an 
irrecoverable  age.  Her  purpose  is  rather,  as  her  final  chapter  shows,  to  open  a 
way  for  what  she  calls  “sapiential  theology”  in  our  own  time.  What  she  means 
by  “sapiential  theology”  might  be  put  this  way:  it  is  theology  designed  to  train 
Christians  to  and  for  wisdom,  that  is,  to  direct  their  desire,  to  orient  their 
lives,  and  to  shape  their  character  toward  the  wisdom  that  is  achieved  in 
knowing  God,  and  thus  to  set  their  lives  on  the  only  solid  footing  that  human 
life  can  have.  This  is  the  vision  of  human  excellence  that  Christian  theology 
has  to  offer.  It  is  a vision  that  is  obscured  or  lost  when  theology  becomes  so 
dominantly  a second-order  enterprise  that  it  forgets  or  neglects  its  specifically 
pastoral  function,  its  salutarity,  its  aretegenic  purpose.  And  it  is  a vision  for 
which,  in  a renewed  version,  we  have  a crying  need  today.  By  the  Renewing  of 
Your  Minds  takes  a crucial  step  in  the  direction  of  a renewed  version  of  that 
vision. 


William  S.  Babcock 
Perkins  School  of  Theology 
Southern  Methodist  University 


van  Huyssteen,  J.  Wentzel.  Essays  in  Postfoundationalist  Theology.  Grand  Rap- 
ids: Eerdmans,  1997.  Pp.  285.  $35.00. 

In  this  collection  of  recent  essays,  Wentzel  van  Huyssteen  presents  us  with 
subtle  discussions  of  some  of  the  contemporary  challenges  facing  theology 
from  the  wider  intellectual  world.  He  is  the  James  I.  McCord  Professor  of 
Theology  and  Science  at  Princeton  Theological  Seminary,  and  all  the  essays 
have  appeared  elsewhere.  They  are,  however,  all  interrelated  and  together 
make  a fascinating  introduction  to  some  of  the  weighty  problems  facing  the 
claims  by  theology  to  be  itself  as  rational  a discipline  as  any  science. 

What  is  “postfoundationalist  theology”?  Van  Huyssteen  sees  it  in  the 
context  of  the  present  wave  of  postmodernism  which  at  times  appears  to 
threaten  every  intellectual  discipline.  At  its  worst,  postmodernism  can  under- 


296 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


mine  the  so-called  “Enlightenment”  view  of  rationality  to  such  an  extent  that 
there  seems  no  scope  left  for  dispassionate,  unprejudiced  reason,  nor  any 
capacity  for  the  grasping  of  truth.  All  belief  is  seen  to  have  a local  and  not  a 
universal  validity,  to  be  so  embedded  in  its  context  that  it  can  have  no 
application  beyond  it.  Even  the  physical  sciences  have  been  accused  of  being 
mere  expressions  of  cultural  beliefs,  rather  than  discoveries  of  the  nature  of 
reality.  All  human  intellectual  activity  (theology  included)  then  becomes  a 
matter  of  construction  rather  than  discovery. 

One  powerful  motive  behind  this  onslaught  of  relativism  (sometimes  hardly 
distinguishable  from  nihilism)  is  the  view,  now  widely  accepted  in  the 
philosophy  of  science,  that  our  beliefs  cannot  be  derived  from  solid,  self- 
evident  foundations.  Even  “raw”  sense  experience  is  highly  impregnated  from 
the  beginning  with  interpretation  and  theory.  Van  Huyssteen  adopts  this 
position  himself,  and  most  interestingly  applies  it  beyond  the  physical  sci- 
ences. He  treats  theology  in  an  analogous  way  as  an  interpretation  of 
experience.  He  wishes  to  avoid  the  absolutist  certainties  of  foundationalism 
and  the  incoherent  relativism  of  most  forms  of  non-foundationalism.  Instead, 
his  postfoundationalist  theology  acknowledges  the  crucial  importance  of 
context  in  shaping  our  views,  but  at  the  same  time  attempts  to  embrace  a 
notion  of  rationality  which  enables  us  to  engage  in  a cross-cultural  and 
cross-disciplinary  conversation.  It  is  with  the  latter  aim  that  van  Huyssteen 
tries  to  produce  a postfoundationalist  model  of  rationality  which  can  show 
points  of  contact  between  religion  and  science.  He  also  hopes  to  maintain  that 
it  is  possible  to  make  rational  choices  between  different  viewpoints  and 
traditions.  He  takes  seriously  the  pluralism  of  contemporary  postmodernism, 
while  not  conceding  the  impossibility  of  rationality  or  the  inevitable  break- 
down of  intellectual  life  into  compartments  totally  insulated  from  each  other. 

The  book  examines  the  ways  in  which  theology  and  other  intellectual 
disciplines  have  to  face  the  same  challenges  amid  our  contemporary  loss  of 
certainty  and  agreement.  The  attempt  to  find  a middle  way  between  absolut- 
ism and  relativism  is  praiseworthy.  Most  refreshing  of  all  is  van  Huyssteen’s 
determination  to  relate  theology  to  science,  which  is  often  regarded  as  the 
best  example  of  human  rationality  at  work.  Yet  perhaps  he  too  easily  accepts 
that  there  can  be  no  universal  standards  of  rationality.  This  is  doubtless 
because  he  is  concentrating  on  problems  of  epistemology  and  not  on  the 
metaphysical  underpinning  of  religion.  Yet  must  not  Christianity  hold  a belief 
in  a God  who  is  the  source  of  all  reason?  Indeed,  may  not  the  physical  sciences 
themselves  be  possible  only  because  they  attempt  to  depict  a world  that  is 
already  structured  and  ordered,  since  it  reflects  the  mind  of  its  Creator?  In 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


297 


other  words,  human  rationality  may  not  be  so  much  the  product  of  local 
circumstances  as  one  way  in  which  we  are  made  in  the  image  of  God.  It  can 
reflect  a reality,  both  physical  and  spiritual,  which  confronts  us  all. 

These  essays  go  to  the  heart  of  several  important  intellectual  debates  raging 
at  the  present  time.  The  relation  of  religion  and  science  and  the  problem  of 
pluralism  and  truth  are  only  two  which  are  presented  in  this  enormously  rich 
and  deep  contribution  to  contemporary  theology.  If  this  volume  is  any  guide, 
its  author’s  next  book  should  be  eagerly  awaited. 

Roger  Trigg 
University'  of  Warwick 

Gaventa,  Beverly  Roberts.  First  and  Second  Thessalonians.  Louisville:  Westmin- 
ster John  Knox,  1998.  Pp.  138.  $22.00. 

These  days  commentaries  are  multiplying  like  rabbits.  We  have  single 
volume  commentaries  of  over  a thousand  pages,  two  volume  commentaries, 
and  even  three  volume  commentaries.  What  was  once  a trickle  is  now  a flood. 
And  yet,  in  spite  of  the  profusion  and  confusion  of  commentaries,  there  will 
always  be  a need  for  a commentary  like  this  one— svelte,  direct,  substantial, 
and  up-to-date.  By  all  odds,  the  task  given  the  author  was  impossible.  The 
commentary  had  to  deal  with  the  major  historical  and  theological  problems  of 
the  Thessalonian  correspondence;  it  had  to  point  out  translation  problems 
without  giving  space  to  a full  translation;  it  had  to  sketch  the  social,  cultural, 
philosophical,  and  religious  context  of  both  Paul  and  the  Thessalonian 
church;  it  had  to  deal  selectively  with  the  history  of  interpretation  from  the 
second  century  to  the  present;  it  had  to  offer  concrete  suggestions  for  sermon 
preparation,  teaching  strategies,  and  a discerning  reading;  it  had  to  face 
squarely  the  conflicting  testimony  of  Acts  and  the  undisputed  letters,  and  it 
had  to  show  how  all  of  this  relates  (and  does  not  relate)  to  the  suggested 
readings  of  the  Revised  Common  Lectionary ; it  had  to  deal  with  very'  complex, 
technical  matters  in  simple,  non-technical  language;  and,  it  had  to  do  all  of 
this  in  138  pages  (88  pages  for  1 Thessalonians  and  45  pages  for  2 Thessaloni- 
ans)! Yet,  Gaventa  performed  the  impossible  with  balance,  refreshing  candor, 
absolute  clarity,  and  occasional  wit. 

My  first  impression  of  the  work  as  a whole  was  fortunately  not  the  most 
lasting.  The  binding  of  her  commentaries  on  two  letters  in  one  volume 
appears  to  suggest  a presumption  of  Pauline  authorship  for  both  letters 
without  any  examination  of  the  evidence.  If  I had  any  such  suspicion  it  was 
quickly  and  decisively  put  to  rest  for  Gaventa  follows  no  such  a priori  strategy. 
She  carefully  weighs  the  evidence  which  she  finds  persuasive  that  2 Thessalo- 


298 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


nians  is  in  fact  pseudenonymous  and  then  teases  out  of  the  text  of  2 
Thessalonians  hints  of  continuing  Pauline  influence  in  the  generation  after 
his  death  when  persecution  continued  and  faith  questions  changed  somewhat. 
At  the  micro  level  each  section  begins  with  an  overview,  is  followed  by  a 
discussion  of  issues  raised  or  problems  posed  in  the  text,  then  a summary,  and 
finally  suggestions  for  preaching  and  teaching.  At  the  macro  level  overarching 
themes  are  easily  recognizable.  Paul’s  Jewishness  is  roundly  affirmed  even 
while  his  ties  to  the  hellenistic  world  are  recognized.  Gaventa  lifts  up  for  the 
reader  the  apocalyptic  dimension  of  Paul’s  gospel  and  his  aposdeship  and  the 
special  difficulty  this  apocalyptic  mythology  posed  for  the  readers  of  the  first 
as  well  as  the  twentieth  century,  and  she  correctly  stresses  the  role  Paul  played 
in  shaping  his  apocalyptic  idiom  and  the  identity  of  the  community.  Given 
this  rather  ambitious  agenda,  I would  tend  to  agree  with  her  that  her 
statement  that  the  primary  purpose  of  the  letter  is  consolation  and  upbuilding 
is  an  oversimplification. 

As  accessible  and  suggestive  as  is  this  slender  volume,  there  is  a price  to  be 
paid  for  its  economy  of  words.  One  senses  that  the  issues  are  more  complex 
and  the  scholarly  discussion  much  richer  and  more  contentious  than  Gaven- 
ta’s  concise  and  able  summaries  allow.  On  such  questions  as  the  authenticity 
of  1 Thessalonians  2:14-16,  for  example,  one  hungers  for  a more  extended  and 
considered  treatment  of  Birger  Pearson’s  interpolation  theory  which  many 
have  found  persuasive.  Only  here  and  there  in  such  a compact  volume  does 
one  catch  a fleeting  glimpse  of  a vast  and  interesting  secondary  literature  on  1 
Thessalonians  that  flowed  out  of  a seminar  of  the  Society  of  Biblical  Litera- 
ture spanning  a decade.  One  might  have  wished  for  more  on  the  impact  of 
persecution  on  both  Paul  and  his  converts  and  for  a more  extended  discussion 
of  the  importance  of  the  letter  as  a substitute  for  presence  and  as  a corporate 
instrument.  The  conversation  about  boundaries  is  important  for  a church  that 
has  largely  assimilated  to  the  culture,  but  more  conversation  would  have  been 
welcome  on  the  distinction  between  difference  and  otherness,  and  on  the 
protocol  for  interaction  between  the  insider  and  outsider.  For  while  there  are 
boundaries,  there  is  no  such  thing  as  an  absolutely  secure  or  absolutely 
permanent  boundary.  All  boundaries  must  have  openings,  and  all  communi- 
ties must  have  a protocol  for  boundary  crossing.  While  the  nuances  of  those 
transactions  are  largely  ignored  in  this  volume,  the  fault  is  not  the  author’s  but 
that  of  the  imposed  constrictions  of  series.  Her  commentary  is  highly 
recommended  for  pastors  and  curious  laity. 

Calvin  J.  Roetzel 
Macalester  College 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


299 


Wainwright,  Geoffrey.  For  Our  Salvation:  Two  Approaches  to  the  Work  of  Christ. 
Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1997.  Pp.  186.  $18.00. 

Many  books  on  Christology  and  atonement  theology  have  appeared  in  the 
past  two  decades,  but  few  as  helpful  and  illuminating  as  Geoffrey  Wain- 
wright’s  latest  book  on  the  work  of  Christ.  The  book  is  comprised  of  two 
distinct  parts;  each  is  a set  of  lectures  given  in  differing  contexts  to  seminary" 
students,  pastors,  and  laypersons.  Thus,  the  book  has  no  overarching  thesis  or 
argument.  Yet  the  coherence  of  the  book  lies  in  its  continuity  with  the 
tradition  of  the  Nicene  Creed  and  its  affirmations  on  the  work  of  Christ  “for 
our  salvation.” 

The  first  set  of  lectures  is  entitled  “Senses  of  the  Word.”  Here  is  a 
fascinating  and  creative  exposition  on  the  meaning  of  the  Incarnation  in  the 
life  of  the  church.  Wainwright  emphasizes  the  “thick  texture”  of  the  human 
life  of  Jesus  Christ.  A full  understanding  of  the  Incarnation  requires  the 
affirmation  not  only  that  Jesus  Christ  is  fully  God  but  also  that  he  lived  the  full 
range  of  human  experiences  and  senses.  Wainwright  means  “senses”  quite 
literally;  Jesus  saw,  heard,  touched,  tasted,  and  smelled.  From  this,  he 
observes,  “Given  this  utterly  corporeal  character  of  the  human  life  lived  by 
the  Word  of  God  for  the  redemption  of  the  world,  it  is  entirely  congruous 
that  he  should  choose  to  keep  coming  to  his  church  by  material  means  for  the 
sake  of  our  salvation”  (p.  1 1). 

Our  own  senses,  then,  are  a gift  of  God  that  must  be  transformed  in  order 
to  respond  to  God’s  gifts  of  revelation  and  redemption.  Our  senses  are 
transformed  when  we  offer  ourselves  — body  and  soul  — to  God.  They  are 
transformed  when  we  use  our  senses  — our  bodies — to  mediate  goodness  to 
others,  in  ministering  to  the  nourishment  of  others,  as  we  become  the  “aroma 
of  Christ”  to  others,  in  the  memorable  phrase  of  2 Corinthians  2:14-16.  And, 
as  Wainwright  says,  “the  gradual  transformation  of  our  senses  prepares  us  for 
the  final  resurrection  when  we  shall  start  to  enjoy  those  things  which,  even 
now,  our  eyes  have  not  seen,  our  ears  heard,  not  our  hearts  conceived,  but 
which  God  has  in  store  for  those  who  love  him”  (p.  18). 

The  rest  of  this  set  of  lectures  considers  the  senses  one  by  one.  Chapter  2, 
for  example,  considers  how  Jesus  heard , how  we  hear,  and  how  we  help  others 
to  hear;  Chapter  3 reflects  on  how  smell  and  touch  can  become  “extended 
responses”  — liturgically  and  in  acts  of  Christian  service  — to  God’s  gift  in 
Christ.  Always,  Wainwright  mines  the  deep  vein  of  the  biblical  text,  ecumeni- 
cal sources,  and  integrated  theology  and  praxis.  It  is  a set  of  lectures  rich  in 
insight,  creativity,  and  wisdom. 


300 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


The  second  set  of  lectures  is  a fresh  perspective  on  an  old  theological 
rubric,  the  munus  triplex,  or  three-fold  office  of  Christ.  Prophet,  priest,  and 
king  is  a comprehensive  formula  often  used  in  the  Reformed  tradition,  but  it 
finds  its  roots  much  earlier  and  is  also  attested  in  Lutheran,  Methodist,  and 
Catholic  traditions  as  well.  Wainwright’s  is  not  a historical  exposition;  rather, 
he  identifies  five  uses  or  contexts  in  which  the  three-fold  office  is  found.  They 
are  the  christological,  the  baptismal,  the  soteriological,  the  ministerial,  and 
the  ecclesiological.  Each  of  these  uses  is  then  unpacked  for  each  of  the  offices. 
The  result  is  a full  overview  of  the  formula  and  its  wealth  of  practical 
implications.  Although  for  some  theologians  today,  the  munus  triplex  is  too 
abstract  and  systematized,  Wainwright  displays  the  remarkable  flexibility  of 
the  three-fold  office  as  well  as  its  striking  ability  to  give  a comprehensive, 
complete,  and  expansive  view  of  the  work  of  Christ  in  his  life,  ministry,  death, 
and  resurrection. 

This  is  a book  that  is  of  obvious  benefit  to  students.  But  it  is  rewarding  for 
pastors  as  well  — especially  preaching  pastors.  It  is  a model  of  biblically  rooted, 
creatively  appropriated,  and  concretely  applied  Christian  theology. 

Leanne  Van  Dyk 
Western  Theological  Seminary 


Ford,  Richard  Q.  The  Parables  of  Jesus:  Recovering  the  Art  of  Listening.  Minne- 
apolis: Fortress,  1997.  Pp.  183.  $18.00. 

Few  books  that  I have  read  over  the  years  have  gripped  me  as  this  one  has. 
For  starters,  it  did  not  take  long— no  more  than  three  or  four  pages  — to  break 
through  my  initial  scepticism  that  a psychotherapist  could  possibly  have  the 
requisite  competence  to  write  a book  on  Jesus’s  parables.  My  scepticism  was 
overwhelmed  by  Ford’s  obvious  command  of  the  scholarly  literature  on  the 
parables,  but,  even  more  importantly,  the  book’s  very  argument  identified  the 
unacknowledged  presuppositions  of  my  scepticism,  i.e.,  that  most  of  us  are 
habituated  to  taking  sides  when  we  hear  or  read  a parable,  and  usually  this 
means  siding  with  those  who  hold  positions  of  dominance  (in  this  case,  bona 
fide  biblical  scholars)  even  when  we  more  closely  identify  with  the  subordi- 
nate class  (in  this  case,  the  psychotherapeutic  interloper  into  biblical  matters). 
Another  basis  for  my  scepticism,  however,  and  one  more  defensible,  was  my 
assumption,  based  on  the  book’s  subtitle,  that  this  would  be  another  bland, 
even  boring  exercise  in  “reader-response  criticism.”  While  this  book,  like 
reader-response  theory,  “privileges”  the  reader  or  listener,  it  does  so  in  such 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3QI 


an  innovative,  unexpected  manner  that  all  assumptions  about  this  being  a dull 
text  inviting  a perfunctory  reading  were  quickly  set  aside. 

Ford’s  basic  argument  is  that  the  listener  to  a parable  of  Jesus  is  placed  in 
much  the  same  predicament  as  a therapist  listening  to  a client.  The  therapist  is 
sorely  tempted  to  take  sides,  whether  for  the  client,  for  the  person  the  client 
currently  opposes  (who  may  be  the  therapist),  or  for  one  tendency  of  the  client 
against  another  tendency.  By  succumbing  to  this  temptation,  one  resolves  the 
ambiguity  that  the  client,  qua  client,  poses  or  represents,  but  such  premature 
foreclosure  distorts  reality  and  cheats  the  client  of  the  very  internal  and 
external  resources  needed  to  deal  effectively  with  her  life  situation.  We  tend 
to  hear  the  parables  in  much  the  same  way,  with  much  the  same  effect.  We 
rush  to  judgment,  applauding  the  generosity  of  the  vineyard  owner  and 
condemning  the  workers  for  their  obtuseness;  celebrating  the  reconciling 
actions  of  the  father  toward  his  long-lost  son  and  praising  his  kindly  overtures 
to  his  hurt  but  grudging  elder  son;  and  throwing  verbal  brickbats  at  the  slave 
who  fails  to  show  the  same  magnanimity  toward  his  fellow  slave  that  the 
master  had  exhibited  toward  him.  We  even  tell  ourselves  that  such  generosity, 
such  proffered  reconciliation,  such  magnanimity  is  a reflection  of  God’s  ways 
with  us. 

But  such  responses  are  more  like  those  that  we  elicit  from  our  spouses  or  a 
close  friend  when  we  complain  about  a difficult  coworker,  or  when  we  relate 
an  unpleasant  incident  involving  an  inattentive  waitress  or  aggressive  driver. 
For  a spouse  or  good  friend  not  to  take  our  side,  not  to  see  the  conflict  from 
our  own  point  of  view,  would  be  an  act  of  betrayal:  “Whose  side  are  you  on, 
anyway?”  The  therapist’s  role  is  different.  For  the  sake  of  the  client,  the 
therapist  resists  such  rushes  to  judgment  and  instead  reserves  judgment, 
asking  probing  questions,  presenting  counter-hypotheses,  and,  above  all, 
viewing  the  current  episode  in  light  of  a long  history  of  interactions,  reaching, 
in  many  cases,  all  the  way  back  to  the  client’s  childhood.  Similarly  located,  the 
acts  of  generosity  and  magnanimity  related  in  the  parable  may  no  longer  seem 
so  beneficent  or  benign,  for  they  both  disguise  and  rationalize  a history  of 
inequality,  of  dominance  and  control,  and  provoke  in  the  recipient  of  this 
sudden  act  of  generosity  a profound  sense  of  confusion  or  despair,  and  may 
even  introduce  a new  element  of  danger  owing  to  the  destablization  it 
introduces  into  an  already  tense,  suspicion-ridden  relationship. 

Thus,  we  are  cautioned  against  an  uncritical  adoption  of  the  perspective  of 
the  magnanimous  vineyard  owner  or  the  so-called  “prodigal  father.”  But  this 
does  not  mean  that  we  should  rush  to  the  opposite  judgment,  that  of 
applauding  or  praising  the  response  of  the  one  who  has  been  die  victim  of  a 


3°2 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


longstanding  abusive  or  de-legitimating  situation,  for  this  response  is  most 
likely  a confused,  inarticulate  misapprehension  of  the  situation  or  of  the 
victim’s  real,  as  opposed  to  assumed,  desires  and  needs.  The  solution,  if  there 
is  one,  and  it  is  always  one  that  will  be  tentative,  proximate  and  for  the  time 
being,  is  not  in  the  words  or  gestures  of  one  or  another  of  the  story’s 
characters,  but  becomes  the  responsibility  of  the  listener  to  imagine  or 
discern.  Why  the  listener?  Because  the  listener,  unlike  the  story’s  participants, 
perceives  the  gaps  in  the  story,  the  lacunae  that  are  owing  to  the  participants’ 
inability  to  communicate  to  one  another,  or  even  to  know  themselves  well 
enough  to  understand  why  they  do  what  they  do  to  one  another.  If  the 
participants  in  the  story  lack  such  self-  and  other-awareness,  the  story  seeks  to 
evoke  such  self-  and  other-awareness  in  the  listeners.  This  places  an  enor- 
mous, but  potentially  liberating,  burden  on  the  listener,  for  the  “change”  that 
the  story  relates  (e.g.,  a father  rushing  to  embrace  his  given-up-for-dead  son) 
is  not  really  change  at  all,  but  more  of  the  same,  whereas  the  parable  offers 
“the  possibility  of  change  only  when  the  listener  actively  works  to  create  the 
outcome”  (p.  128). 

Ford  provides  penetrating  analyses  of  seven  parables,  and,  in  each  case, 
draws  on  four  vital  resources:  biblical  scholarship  on  the  parable  in  question, 
psychotherapeutic  scholarship  (with  a particular  orientation  toward  the  psy- 
choanalytic), the  insights  of  colleagues  and  clients  (with  appropriate  attribu- 
tions), and  his  own  probings  honed  through  years  of  active,  psychotherapeutic 
listening.  In  the  course  of  his  analysis  of  a parable,  or  pair  of  them,  he 
frequently  “cues”  the  reader,  noting  that  here,  at  this  juncture  of  the  analysis, 
the  listener  is  faced  with  a decision,  one  not  unlike  that  posed  for  its  original 
hearers,  i.e.,  of  yielding  oneself  to  the  story’s  own  power  to  disorient,  or  to 
find,  instead,  some  safe  vantage  point  from  which  to  gain  critical  distance. 
Ford’s  use  of  psychoanalytic  notions  of  transference  for  insight  into  the 
parable  of  the  widow  and  judge  is  especially  germane,  as  it  disabuses  one  of 
any  presumption  that  there  is  automatic  safety  via  the  therapeutic  role  itself. 

The  most  suggestive  feature  of  the  book  for  further  reflection  is  Ford’s  view 
that  Jesus’s  parables  express  a “powerfully  ironic  vision”  (p.  1 2 2).  He  suggests, 
but  does  not  explore  the  further  implications  of  the  view,  that  as  an  ironist, 
Jesus  invited  retaliation  and  in  a sense  courted  his  own  eventual  death  by 
violent  means.  This  suggestion  put  me  in  mind  of  Linda  Hutcheon’s  discus- 
sion, in  Irony's  Edge  (Routledge,  1994),  of  the  “risky  business”  of  irony,  owing 
to  its  “transideological  politics,”  and  her  argument  that  the  “communicative 
space”  into  which  irony  insinuates  itself  is  “a  highly  unstable  one,  sometimes 
even  a dangerous  one”  (p.  204).  Among  die  various  available  texts  on  the 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3°3 


parables  of  Jesus,  Ford’s  is,  in  my  view,  the  most  effective  in  explaining  (and  it 
is  the  goal  of  psychology  to  offer  explanations)  why  Jesus  could  become 
politically  vulnerable  on  the  basis  of  his  role  as  storyteller.  This  raises  the 
question,  which  Ford  does  not  explore,  of  what  may  have  been  the  personal 
circumstances  that  made  Jesus  into  an  ironist?  His  “Appendix,”  a discussion 
of  the  similarities  between  Jesus’s  parable  of  the  two  sons  and  their  father  and 
the  book  of  Genesis,  invites  us  to  consider  that  these  ironizing  tendencies 
derived  from  an  ambivalent  relation  to  his  own  religious  tradition.  In  addi- 
tion, however,  this  ironic  temperament,  while  politically  dangerous,  may  also 
have  been  a means  of  personal  survival  in  his  family  and  village  of  origin.  Or 
so  Ford’s  own  interpretive  method  would  lead  us  to  conjecture. 

Donald  Capps 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Gerkin,  Charles  V.  An  Introduction  to  Pastoral  Care.  Nashville:  Abingdon, 
1997.  Pp.  264.  $24.95. 

This  volume  marks  a new  departure  in  introductory  texts  in  pastoral  care. 
Charles  Gerkin,  who  retired  from  the  faculty  of  Candler  School  of  Theology 
after  a lifetime  of  teaching  pastoral  care  in  both  clinical  and  academic  settings, 
has  brought  his  wisdom  and  experience  to  bear  on  the  important  question  of 
what  shall  first  be  taught  to  and  learned  by  students  who  may  never  take 
further  work.  Without  abandoning  the  twentieth-century  characteristics  of 
the  field  of  pastoral  care  (taken  by  Gerkin  to  be  gains  on  the  whole),  which  are 
sometimes  lumped  together  as  comprising  a “therapeutic”  model,  he  seeks  to 
broaden  the  field  and  to  place  it  carefully  in  its  context  of  the  congregation 
and  the  tradition.  As  the  author  says,  this  book  is  a “tour  of  an  arena  of 
ministry”  (p.  1 1),  not  a manual  for  teaching  and  learning  elementary  pastoral 
care. 

Viewing  the  minister  in  a primary  image  of  interpretive  guide  (reminiscent 
of  the  “master  role”  proposed  and  studied  by  Samuel  Blizzard  nearly  a half 
century  ago),  who  is  “.  . . competent  in  helping  people  make  connections 
between  their  lives  of  faith  within  the  community  and  tradition  that  identifies 
us  as  the  people  of  God,  and  the  day-to-day  individual,  social,  and  cultural 
realities  of  our  lives”  (p.  95),  Gerkin  wants  to  broaden  the  scope  of  pastoral 
care  to  include  priestly  and  prophetic  as  well  as  shepherding  and  wisdom 
imparting  functions,  as,  he  says,  were  the  focus  earlier  in  this  century.  Out  of 
these  broader  images  of  ministry  Gerkin  brings  a quadrilateral  schema  for 
pastoral  care  comprised  of  (1)  individuals  and  families,  (2)  the  community  of 


3°4 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Christians,  (3)  the  tradition  that  shapes  Christian  identity,  and  (4)  the  cultural 
context  (pp.  34-35).  Thus,  he  broadens  both  the  iconic  bases  of  ministry  and 
the  field  of  focus  to  encompass  a much  wider  scope  for  pastoral  care  than  have 
most  previous  modern  writers  in  the  field. 

Gerkin’s  proposals  for  pastoral  care  are  approached  through  the  currently 
popular  narrative  hermeneutic  model,  based  in  turn  on  George  Lindbeck’s 
cultural-linguistic  approach  to  theology,  as  Gerkin’s  use  of  “story”  to  speak  of 
connections  between  the  individual  and  the  stream  of  history  suggests. 
Richness  of  human  connectedness  is  pervasive  in  the  book,  presented  in  many 
“stories.”  There  is  no  attention  to  basic  steps  in  learning  pastoral  care,  as  we 
find  in  most  introductory  texts,  nor  much  to  questions  of  diagnosis.  There  is  a 
solid  grounding  in  the  history  of  pastoral  care,  with  special  nuanced  attention 
to  the  twentieth  century,  in  which  the  author  himself  played  a significant  part. 

Perhaps  the  most  important  contribution  of  this  book  to  the  understanding 
of  any  student/practitioner  of  pastoral  care  is  its  emphasis  on  the  complex 
embeddedness  of  pastoral  care  in  the  life  of  the  churches.  Too  often  in  the 
past  we  may  have  given  the  impression  that  it  was  something  apart  from 
congregational  life.  Gerkin’s  introductory  text  is  a powerful  antidote  for  that 
error  in  perception,  rightly  emphasizing  the  informal  care  given  by  lay 
Christians  to  one  another.  Ministry  is  also  depicted  realistically  as  an  enter- 
prise without  complete  closure  that  is  nonetheless  rewarding  both  for  the 
caregiver  and  the  care  receiver.  Even  though  the  quadrilateral  structure  is,  to 
cite  Gerkin’s  own  words,  “held  together  only  in  an  exceedingly  fragile  way” 
(p.  233),  it  draws  valid  attention  to  the  connectedness  of  all  ministry,  from  the 
most  intimate  one-on-one  relations  to  the  activism  of  social  and  political 
protest.  Further,  the  historical  section  alone  is  quite  valuable— perhaps  the 
best  summary  in  existence  — especially  of  twentieth-century  developments. 

It  is  obvious  that  if  a “how  to  do  it”  introductory  text  is  needed,  this  is  not 
the  right  one.  Vision  and  not  clarity  about  the  details  of  ministry  are  what  we 
have  here.  I confess,  also,  to  a sense  of  uneasiness  about  the  sufficiency  of  the 
narrative  hermeneutic  approach,  even  while  I affirm  its  usefulness.  Something 
like  it  is  a necessary,  but  not  sufficient,  approach  to  understanding  the  human 
scene.  To  quote  George  Stroup,  one  of  the  advocates  of  narrative  in  theology: 
“What  precisely  is  ‘narrative  truth’  and  what  are  the  criteria  for  “truthful- 
ness” in  narrative  theology?”  (Musser  and  Price,  eds.,  A New  Handbook  of 
Christian  Theology,  p.  327)  This  question  about  truth  has  implications  for 
pastoral  diagnosis.  Pastoral  care  is  finally  about  concrete  action,  where  truth 
matters.  Being  dead  wrong  has  consequences  beyond  the  validity  of  models. 
Thus,  were  I teaching  an  introductory  course  in  pastoral  care,  I would  use 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3°5 


Gerkin’s  book  for  vision,  but  I would  also  use  others  for  clarity,  such  as 
Howard  ClinebelPs  still  being  revised  text,  Basic  Types  of  Pastoral  Care  and 
Counseling. 

James  N.  Lapsley 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Mercadante,  Linda  A.  Victims  and  Sinners:  Spiritual  Roots  of  Addiction  and 
Recovery.  Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox,  1996.  Pp.  220.  $20.00. 

Linda  Mercadante,  Professor  of  Theology  at  the  Methodist  Theological 
School  in  Ohio,  has  written  a compelling  critique  of  the  Addiction-Recovery 
movement  from  a theological  standpoint.  She  voices  her  concern  that  the 
Addiction-Recovery  model,  with  its  own  distinct  understanding  of  sin  and 
conversion,  has  eclipsed  the  far  broader  and  more  inclusive  doctrine  of  sin, 
redemption,  and  grace  evidenced  in  the  revelation  of  Christ  Jesus.  In  an  effort 
to  garner  some  of  the  popularity  of  the  Recovery7  movement  and  translate  it 
into  full  pews,  pastors  may  focus  too  closely  on  specific  problems  or  addic- 
tions and  not  on  the  universal  brokenness  of  humanity  or  God’s  all- 
encompassing  grace. 

Behavior  that  was  once  spoken  of  as  sinful  is  now  referred  to  as  addictive. 
This  turns  the  concept  of  sin  into  either  a failure  of  willpower  and  morality  or 
into  a disease.  Indeed,  this  is  a popular  categorization.  Both  Gerald  Alay  and 
Keith  Miller,  in  their  widely  read  recovery  materials,  use  this  paradigm. 
Addiction  has  now  come  to  be  understood  as  compulsions  or  behaviors  far 
beyond  what  the  founders  of  Alcoholics  Anonymous  (AA)  ever  envisioned. 
The  cultural  drive  to  label  a large  variety  of  behaviors  as  addictive  has 
stretched  the  original  Recovery  model  of  AA  to  its  limits.  It  was  intended  for 
life-threatening  illness,  not  vague  discontent. 

Mercadante  points  out  that  sin  is  first  about  orientation,  not  behavior. 
Many  Recovery  models  lack  the  understanding  of  sin  as  primarily  separation 
from  God.  As  the  primary  metaphor  for  sin,  addiction  tends  to  minimize  the 
place  of  the  doctrine  of  sin  within  the  greater  doctrine  of  salvation.  Grace 
then  becomes  some  elusive  factor  one  hopes  to  find,  rather  than  the  preve- 
nient  presence  of  God. 

This  book  is  a well-researched  starting  point  to  open  discussions  between 
Christian  theology  and  twelve-step  programs.  Mercadante’s  discussion  of  sin, 
salvation,  and  grace  is  rich  and  thought  provoking.  She  has  included  a 
thorough  discussion  on  the  antecedents  of  Alcoholic’s  Anonymous  in  the 
Oxford  Groups  of  the  1930s,  and  how  Buchman’s  and  Shoemaker’s  thinking 


306 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


influenced  its  theological  roots.  For  those  unfamiliar  with  the  major  text  of 
AA  (the  “Big  Book”  as  it  is  called  by  members),  she  reviews  it  with  respect  to 
its  theology.  I was  pleased  to  see  Mercadante’s  familiarity  with  the  Big  Book. 
It  is  disconcerting  to  read  so  many  analyses  of  the  Addiction-Recovery 
movement  from  people  who  have  never  read  its  primary  text. 

There  are  some  weaknesses  in  Mercadante’s  analysis  of  AA.  Many  of  her 
comments  on  areas  of  misplaced  AA  theology  are  more  criticisms  of  the 
failure  of  the  church  to  explain  its  doctrines  and  broaden  the  understanding  of 
God  that  comes  in  recovery.  One  of  the  founders  of  AA,  Bill  Wilson,  referred 
to  AA  as  a “spiritual  kindergarten.”  Alcoholics  Anonymous  was  never  meant 
to  be  the  completion  of  the  spiritual  journey,  but  rather  its  start.  Unfortu- 
nately, the  Recovery  movement  has  become  an  end  in  itself  for  many  people. 
This  may  be  because  of  the  church’s  unwillingness  or  inability  to  expose  its 
congregations  to  the  full  breadth  of  Christian  experience  and  understanding. 

Mercadante  does  not  address  the  effect  that  the  working  of  the  twelve  steps 
has  on  a person’s  life.  Many  of  her  criticisms  come  from  the  misunderstanding 
that  occurs  when  one  is  an  outsider  to  the  recovery  movement  and  has  not 
actually  done  the  work  of  the  steps.  Even  when  there  has  been  tremendous 
research  and  attendance  at  many  meetings,  the  energy  spent  outside  of 
meetings  on  step  work  is  often  overlooked.  This  outside  work,  including 
prayer  and  meditation,  is  the  core  of  many  member’s  programs.  As  with 
spiritual  disciplines,  the  steps  may  seem  more  oppressive  in  the  reading  than 
in  the  doing;  indeed,  often  that  which  seems  disciplined  is  actually  freeing. 

Victims  and  Sinners  strives  for  a dialogue  between  Christian  theology  and 
the  Addiction-Recovery  movement,  not  a merger  of  the  two.  This  is  a helpful 
attempt  to  begin  the  conversation. 

Elizabeth  Brishcar 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Seitz,  Christopher  R.  Word  without  End:  The  Old  Testament  as  Abiding  Theologi- 
cal Witness,  Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1998.  Pp.  355.  $28.00. 

Old  Testament  studies  are  in  turmoil  today,  and  consensus  is  lacking 
almost  everywhere.  The  headlines  are  grabbed  by  a few  “minimalists,”  who 
deny  the  historicity  even  of  large  parts  of  the  monarchic  period  and  who 
eschew  any  interest  in  the  theological  message  of  the  Bible.  Seitz  is  at  the 
exact  opposite  end  of  the  trajectory,  with  a focus  on  the  canonical  or  final 
shape  of  the  text  and  with  a passionate  interest  in  the  theological  necessity  of 
the  biblical  message.  His  polemic  is  against  the  dominance  of  historical 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3°7 


criticism  and/or  the  pursuit  of  the  world  behind  the  text.  The  twenty-one 
essays  in  this  book  are  divided  into  three  categories:  biblical  theology, 
exegesis,  and  practice,  and  they  illustrate  his  approach  in  exciting  ways. 

Seitz  charges  that  many  biblical  scholars  believe  they  have  access  to  the 
Bible’s  religious  point  of  view  only  by  disassembling  its  final  form  and  ranging 
its  texts  in  proper,  that  is,  developmental,  order.  He  wants  to  cultivate  a 
reverence  among  seminarians  for  what  an  honor  it  is  to  read  this  literature  at 
all  and  to  create  an  intellectual  horizon  consisting  of  a complex  network  of 
intertextuality  that  binds  all  texts  together.  He  favors  a return  to  typological 
readings  of  the  Old  Testament  and  a reuniting  of  Old  and  New  Testament 
studies.  He  even  hopes  for  a return  to  the  sensus  literalis  and  the  creation  of  a 
standard  seminary  course  in  Christian  Scripture,  where  a natural  movement 
from  the  Old  Testament  to  the  New,  and  New  to  Old,  is  the  focus  of  scholarly 
theological  attention.  The  term  “Hebrew  Bible”  fails  to  comprehend  the 
Christological  center  of  the  Bible  or  to  explain  how  Israel’s  book  has  become  a 
word  of  address  for  all  creation. 

The  essays  devoted  to  exegesis  deal  for  the  most  part  with  Isaiah  (see  his 
commentary  on  Isaiah  1-39  in  the  Interpretation  series  and  numerous  other 
publications  on  the  prophet).  He  insists  that  Isaiah  40-66  must  be  read  within 
the  context  of  1-39  and  concludes  that  no  new  prophet  is  present  in  40-66,  but 
God  here  refers  Israel  to  what  “Isaiah”  had  spoken  beforehand.  The  servant 
sees  himself  and  his  vocation  as  bringing  to  completion  God’s  word  spoken  to 
the  prophets  of  old.  Concern  with  the  book  of  Isaiah  in  its  entirety  involves  the 
expectation  that  a single  perspective  — that  of  God  or  that  of  Isaiah  as  God’s 
spokesman  — pervades  all  sixty-six  chapters.  In  the  section  devoted  to  exegesis, 
Seitz  also  reexamines  Exodus  3 and  6 and  pulls  the  rug  from  under  studies  that 
base  the  division  into  J,  E,  and  P in  the  Pentateuch  on  the  basis  of  these 
chapters.  In  his  reading,  Exodus  3 has  Moses  learn  the  name  Yahweh  for  the 
first  time  so  that  he  might  speak  in  the  name  of  this  God  before  those 
Israelites  who  already  know  the  name.  Exodus  6 is  not  a record  of  the  first 
revelation  of  the  name  Yahweh,  but  the  beginning  of  the  disclosure  of  the 
significance  of  the  name  “I  will  be  what  I will  be.”  In  the  events  of  the  exodus, 
culminating  in  Exodus  14-15,  God  makes  himself  known  as  he  truly  is. 

The  essays  in  section  3 are  likely  to  be  the  most  controversial  and,  to  my 
mind,  the  least  convincing.  Seitz  takes  a strong  stand  against  homosexuality, 
arguing  that  this  stance  is  the  plain  sense  of  scripture  and  that  to  link  love  and 
homosexuality  is  similar  to  speaking  of  “blessed  greed”  or  “holy  drunken- 
ness.” He  holds  that  the  church  is  constrained  to  proscribe  homosexual 
behavior  among  its  members.  There  is  much  of  merit  in  this  discussion, 


308 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


although  he  underestimates,  in  my  judgment,  the  significance  of  our  igno- 
rance of  the  reason  for  the  biblical  critique  of  homosexuality7  and  its  ignorance 
of  sexual  orientation  (Seitz  argues  that  we  are  not  born  gay  or  straight,  only 
male  or  female).  He  points  to  the  seriousness  of  the  biblical  concern  by  noting 
that  Leviticus  20  makes  homosexual  actions  a capital  crime,  but  ignores 
Leviticus  18  that  puts  intercourse  during  a woman’s  period,  homosexual 
actions,  and  bestiality  all  on  the  same  level.  Today,  we  do  not  consider  the 
first  an  ethical  issue  at  all,  and  all  of  us  agree  on  the  wrongness  of  bestiality. 
Are  homosexual  actions  more  like  the  former  or  the  latter? 

While  affirming  the  ordination  of  women,  he  opposes  inclusive  language 
for  God.  He  insists  that  the  biblical  God  is  neither  male  nor  female,  but  that 
in  the  language  of  address  to  God  only  masculine  language  is  appropriate  and 
fitting.  He  argues  that  masculine  language  in  the  biblical  world  was  the  best 
vehicle  for  asserting  the  nonsexual  character  of  God.  Even  if  that  is  true,  it 
clearly  no  longer  conveys  that  to  many  people  today.  Seitz  charges  that  people 
have  lost  their  competence  to  detect  such  a paradox.  I would  argue  that  this 
language  today  can  only  be  seen  as  patriarchal,  regardless  of  its  earlier 
intention. 

Seitz  is  clearly  indebted  to  his  doctor  father  and  former  colleague  at  Yale, 
Brevard  Childs.  He  is  also  a first  rate  exegete  and  theologian,  who  challenges 
the  status  quo  at  many  levels,  even  if  at  times,  in  my  opinion,  he  is  unaware  of 
how  much  his  experience  affects  his  interpretation  of  the  text. 

Ralph  W.  Klein 
Lutheran  School  of  Theology  at  Chicago 

Palmer,  Earl  F.  The  Book  that  James  Wrote.  Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1997. 
Pp.  90.  $10.00. 

Earl  F.  Palmer,  pastor  of  University  Presbyterian  Church  in  Seattle, 
Washington  and  the  author  of  numerous  commentaries  on  the  New  Testa- 
ment, has  written  a helpful,  thematic  commentary  on  the  book  of  James.  The 
author  takes  a definite  stand  on  the  authorship,  setting,  and  intention  of  the 
book  and  cogently  expresses  the  reasons  for  that  stand.  Palmer  makes  a case 
for  James,  the  bishop  of  Jerusalem  and  the  brother  of  Jesus,  as  the  Book’s 
author,  and  places  it  in  Jerusalem  prior  to  the  Roman  destruction  of  the  City 
and  Temple  in  A.D.  70. 

The  pastor’s  bookshelf  would  need  to  include  other  commentaries  that 
allow  the  reader  to  explore  the  background  behind  Palmer’s  interpretive 
decisions  more  fully,  as  well  as  the  merits  of  the  alternatives.  However, 
precisely  because  of  its  clear  commitments,  this  commentary  gives  the  pastor 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3°9 


a point  of  view  with  which  to  dialogue  in  preparation  for  preaching  and 
teaching.  Clearly  written,  and  with  ample  connections  made  to  literature  and 
contemporary  life  and  culture,  this  study  offers  fuel  for  the  homiletical 
imagination.  It  is  also  well  suited  for  small  group  study,  with  reflection 
questions  on  each  chapter  making  it  accessible  to  both  leader  and  participant. 

Palmer  relates  James  helpfully  to  the  rest  of  the  New  Testament  canon.  He 
also  deals  with  the  objections  of  some  historical  interpreters,  most  notably, 
Martin  Luther,  to  the  book’s  emphasis  on  the  works  of  faith.  Throughout  his 
commentary'  he  makes  clear  his  conviction  that  “the  goodness  of  God’s  grace 
is  a vital  theme  in  James,  along  with  his  strong  teaching  on  faith.”  Palmer  is 
convinced  that,  while  James  is  brimming  with  rigorous  “plain  talk”  and  sound 
advice,  it  is  advice  that  we  can  act  on  only  because  Jesus  is  the  Lord  both  of 
this  book  and  our  lives. 

Palmer  divides  James’  treatment  of  faith  into  three  categories:  faith  alive 
(2:14-17),  the  durability  of  faith  (James  5:7-11),  and  faith  in  the  family  of  faith 
(5:13-20).  He  divides  his  discussion  of  James’  view  of  the  nature  of  God  into 
several  helpful  modules  each  of  which  emphasizes  an  aspect  of  God’s  charac- 
ter. Among  them  are  wisdom,  generosity,  hope,  and  judgment.  Perhaps  the 
most  helpful  section  of  the  book  concerns  James’  understanding  of  our 
day-to-day  behavior  as  Christians.  Palmer  entitles  this  chapter  “James  the 
Pastor”  and  organizes  it  around  twelve  pastoral  concerns.  These  are  pre- 
sented in  such  a way  that  their  relevance  to  both  pastors  and  people  is  clear. 

Palmer  at  the  outset  tells  us  this  book  grows  out  of  his  own  “discipleship 
journey  with  the  practical  words  of  James.”  He  depicts  James  as  “practical  and 
specific  in  the  way  that  he  as  a pastor  portrays  to  us  the  meaning  of  our 
discipleship  as  believers.”  The  practical,  specific,  and  devotional  tone  of  this 
commentary  reveal  that  the  author  has  learned  well  from  his  mentor. 

Aiyce  M.  McKenzie 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Leith,  John  H.  Crisis  in  the  Church:  The  Plight  of  Theological  Education. 
Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox,  1997.  Pp.  125.  $12.00. 

This  book  is  a hard-hitting  but  thoroughly  fair  criticism  of  contemporary' 
theological  education  focused  primarily  in  the  Reformed  tradition.  Phis  is  the 
tradition  in  which  John  Leith  has  lived,  ministered,  and  taught  throughout  his 
life,  so  its  inner  structure,  history,  ethos,  upheavals,  and  heartaches  are  well 
known  to  him.  Thus,  his  zeal  in  exposing  the  many  faceted  crises  in  Presbyte- 
rian theological  education  (particularly  Columbia,  Union  [in  Richmond],  and 
Princeton  seminaries)  is  deeply  rooted  in  his  wealth  of  experience  and  love  of 


3IQ 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  church  as  well  as  in  his  theological  scholarship.  He  carefully  documents 
the  major  losses  and  contradictions  which  plague  seminaries  at  all  levels.  In 
brief  sophisticated  discussions  of  the  losses  of  tradition,  gratitude,  church 
orientation,  sense  of  mission  and  direction,  curriculum  focus  on  the  congrega- 
tion, ecclesiastical  commitment,  accountability,  academic  freedom,  and  fi- 
nally the  loss  of  the  ability  of  seminaries  to  educate  graduates  who  are 
effective  pastors,  Leith  attempts  to  document  the  increasing  marginalization 
and  dissipation  of  theological  education.  In  their  failure  to  teach,  practice,  and 
perpetuate  effective  leadership  for  the  church  in  this  generation,  seminaries 
are  significandy  contributing  to  the  secularization  of  the  gospel.  They  are 
preoccupied  with  causes,  straining  at  the  gnats  of  political  correctness  and 
swallowing  the  camels  of  sound  doctrine  and  of  a sine  qua  non  conviction  in 
the  Incarnation,  crucifixion  and  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ.  This  is  a pointed 
and  well  documented  outcry,  and  it  should  get  heard. 

However,  more  needs  to  be  said.  Leith  acknowledges  at  the  beginning, 
indirectly  through  A.  N.  Whitehead,  that  in  our  rapidly  expanding  universe, 
the  corresponding  rapid  expansion  of  consciousness  and  of  culture  (especially 
through  science  and  technology)  is  widening  the  gap  between  the  genera- 
tions. Today,  no  new  generation  is  born  and  raised  in  the  same  culture  and 
tradition  as  its  forebearers,  and  this  has  been  the  case  at  least  throughout  the 
last  half  of  the  twentieth  century.  On  the  one  hand,  this  strengthens  Leith’s 
point  that  since  we  are  living  in  a highly  mobile,  multicultural,  multidisci- 
plinary, and  multinational  world  where  boundaries  familiar  to  Leith  (and  to 
this  reviewer)  are  collapsing,  where  sex  and  violence  are  common  fare  for 
children  as  well  as  adults,  and  nuclearism  hangs  like  the  sword  of  Damocles 
over  civilization,  the  eternal  truths  of  the  gospel  must  be  clearly  delineated, 
taught,  and  inculcated  in  the  leadership  and  the  life  of  the  church.  If  not,  then 
as  Yeat’s  poetic  icon  put  it  long  ago,  “Turning  and  turning  in  widening  gyre, 
the  falcon  cannot  hear  the  falconer;  things  fall  apart;  the  center  cannot  hold.” 
Accommodating  to  the  culture,  the  seminary  and  the  church  fall  apart  because 
they  cannot  hear  the  voice  of  the  One  who  called  them  into  being  and  sent 
them  into  the  world. 

On  the  other  hand,  this  expanding  gap  between  the  generations  makes 
Leith’s  referrals  to  the  great  theologians  of  the  40s  and  50s,  sound  sometimes 
more  nostalgic  than  convincing.  As  someone  said,  nostalgia  isn’t  what  it  used 
to  be.  Reinhold  Niebuhr,  Robert  Calhoun,  Roland  Bainton,  Albert  Outler 
and  others,  who  were  the  faculty  figures  Leith  remembers  with  greatest 
respect  and  calls  current  faculties  to  emulate,  are  surely  powerful  illustrations 
of  faithful  scholarly  witnesses,  teaching  the  church  and  its  leaders  how  to 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


31 1 


understand  and  to  live  the  Christian  life.  But  they  are  also  examples  of  a far 
more  coherent  cultural  milieu  than  pertains  today,  and  their  theological 
instruction  was  able  to  draw  upon  that  presumptive  cultural  coherence  in  its 
disclosure  of  the  ultimate  reality  revealed  in  Jesus  Christ.  However,  the 
accelerating  flow  of  historical  time  has  changed  things  dramatically.  As  Leith 
said  of  himself,  he  was  “evangelical  liberal”  in  those  days,  but  he  and  his 
theological  mentors  had  not  reckoned  with  the  truly  radical  left.  “Things  fall 
apart,”  and  an  evangelical  liberal  at  that  time  is  a present  day  conservative;  not 
because  Leith  has  changed,  but  because  now  that  coherent,  presumptive 
world  is  pulling  apart  and  calling  itself  “postmodern.” 

Ironically,  and  contrary  to  Yeat’s  poetic  vision,  the  center  does  hold,  but  not 
in  the  way  it  used  to.  It  will  not  work  to  go  back  to  former  greats  as  a way  to 
reclaim  the  center.  The  center  holds  because  it  is  eternally  and  relentlessly 
creative.  To  some  extent  Leith  recognizes  this  and  cites  the  return  of  young 
parents  to  the  church,  the  liveliness  of  congregations  where  the  gospel  is 
faithfully  preached,  the  widespread  belief  in  “God”  in  American  society,  and 
other  signs  that  the  Creator  Spirit  is  transforming  its  past  and  doing  new 
things.  The  irony  is  that  the  deepest  criticism  of  the  seminaries  and  the  most 
profound  crisis  in  the  church  are  not  based  in  what  has  been  lost  from  the  past 
but  in  the  apparent  fact  that  we  (seminaries  and  churches)  cannot  seem  to 
grasp  what  the  Spirit  of  God  is  doing  in  transforming  old  patterns  and  raising 
up  new  generations  from  the  grass  roots  of  everyday  life  all  across  the  world. 

Leith’s  challenges  to  get  back  to  fundamentals  and  jettison  cultural  inciden- 
tals is  a good  start,  if  it  is  not  primarily  longing  for  a bygone  era  and  the 
emulation  of  former  greats.  If  it  is  in  recognition  that  the  Creator  Spirit  is  far 
more  radical  than  the  radical  left  and  far  more  centered  than  the  staunchest 
conservative  and  that  God’s  Spirit  is  even  now  at  work  to  create  new  forms  of 
expression  for  the  same  Gospel,  emanating  from  the  same  center,  then  Leith’s 
work  is  truly  catalytic.  However,  discernment  is  desperately  needed. 

In  this  new  era  that  is  saturated  with  multiple  spiritualities,  agog  at  science 
and  technology,  ideologically  hungry  but  cynical  about  ultimates,  lonely  and 
longing  for  nurture  but  expecting  betrayal  from  all  available  sources,  the 
Spirit  of  God  must  not  get  confused  with  the  culture  of  the  present  or  the  past 
because  this  Spirit  points  to  a future  that  belongs  to  God  and  God  alone. 
Leith’s  challenges,  engaged  in  the  context  of  the  Spirit  (which  I assume  is  how 
they  are  intended),  are  extremely  important,  insightful  and  at  times  pro- 
foundly convicting. 

James  E.  Loder 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


312 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Rediger,  G.  Lloyd.  Clergy  Killers:  Guidance  for  Pastors  and  Congregations  under 
Attack.  Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox,  1997.  Pp.  200.  $15.00. 

G.  Lloyd  Rediger  is  a pastor’s  pastor.  As  a consultant,  author,  conflict 
mediator,  and  gifted  teacher,  he  has  had  a wide  influence  in  defining  healthy 
congregational  life,  church  processes,  and  pastor-people  relationships.  His 
work  on  clergy  leadership  issues,  ethical  boundary  definition,  and  the  pastoral 
care  of  clergy  families  has  won  wide  respect.  This  most  recent  contribution 
focuses  on  a specific  kind  of  church  conflict— destructive  conflict  in  a 
clergy-focused  congregation  which  becomes  intractable,  highly  personalized, 
matricidal,  or  most  often  patricidal. 

Rediger’s  central  thesis  is  controversial:  abnormal  conflict  in  congregations 
is  energized,  motivated,  and  usually  led  by  persons  with  significant  personality 
disorders,  mental  illness,  or  obsessional  spiritual  evil.  Normal  conflict  follows 
a course  of  contracting,  clarifying,  evaluating;  but  abnormal  conflicts  create 
chaos  which  requires  diagnosis  and  a treatment  model,  and  spiritual  conflict 
demands  a discernment-intervention  and  exorcism  process.  Active  use  of 
tough  love  models  of  reconstructive  intervention  can  identify  the  disordered 
personality  process  (person  or  persons)  empowering  the  chaos  and  take  firm 
steps  to  surround  the  troubled  person  with  guidance.  A treatment  process  that 
presses  toward  a remedial  solution  can  defuse  the  explosive  charges  awaiting 
the  unwary  and  make  the  community  safe  for  constructive  resolution  of 
remaining  issues.  When  the  destructive  leadership  comes  from  people  of  evil 
character  or  demonic  purpose,  the  intervention  moves  from  a therapeutic 
methodology  to  that  of  exorcism,  “of  expelling  the  person  doing  evil.”  Here 
Rediger  offers  careful  definition  of  a spiritual  intervention  process  that  steers 
away  from  exotic  or  specialized  ritual  toward  a pattern  of  imposing  spiritual 
disciplines  and  communal  controls  on  the  evil  person  which  may  lead  toward 
expulsion  or  exclusion  of  those  who  “incarnate  evil”  or  work  through  the 
domination  by  evil  powers  in  a redemptive  process  appropriate  to  the 
particular  congregation’s  tradition. 

Rediger  uses  recognizable  and  all  too  familiar  case  studies  for  each  of  these 
conflict  situations  which  turn  the  congregational  confusion  into  open  pursuit 
of  the  pastor.  His  book  appears  to  be  a conscious  development  of  the  direc- 
tions set  by  Scott  Peck  in  People  of  the  Lie  and  of  Kenneth  Haugk  in  Antagonists 
in  the  Church , as  he  cites  both  to  provide  confirming  data  on  his  models  of 
personality  and  demonic  disorders  as  useful  ways  of  construing  and  understand- 
ing clergy  focused  on  intensely  destructive  congregational  conflict  situations. 

During  the  last  twenty  years,  there  has  been  a swing  away  from  the  use  of 
cause-and-effect  models  of  conflict  theory  and  a welcome  conversion  to 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3J3 

systems  theory,  allowing  a multifactoral  approach  to  understanding,  manag- 
ing, and  transforming  conflict  situations.  Viewing  the  whole  and  exploring  its 
many  interrelated  dynamics  has  freed  us  from  much  blaming  and  cyclical 
thought  patterns  in  working  through  failures  of  community  to  be  constructive 
and  collaborative.  From  a systems  perspective,  books  which  diagnose  person- 
alities and  credit  them  for  being  the  disorder  which  causes  the  effect  of  human 
conflict  are  seen  as  a movement  backward  to  ways  of  locating  blame  and 
reinforcing  the  chronic  patterns  of  fingering  the  offender  in  the  congregation 
and  practicing  the  ancient  art  of  expulsion.  Conflict  transformation  has 
become  a fresh  voice  in  the  church  that  looks  to  the  way  the  congregation  as  a 
system  invites,  appoints,  rewards,  and  immediately  replaces  the  roles  of  critic, 
gatekeeper,  censor,  hit-man,  etc.  People  are  drawn  into  these  often  destruc- 
tive functions  by  the  group’s  inability  to  function  healthfully  and  faithfully. 

Perhaps  the  best  summarization  of  this  concern  for  encouraging  congrega- 
tions to  use  body  models,  systems  theories,  organismic  metaphors,  and 
wholistic  approaches  to  intervention  and  transformation  of  conflicts  would  be 
to  suggest  warning  labels  for  books  which  support  the  endemic  preference  of 
churches  to  name,  blame,  and  expel  troubled  individuals  as  the  cause  of  their 
group  immaturity. 

David  W.  Augsburger 
Fuller  Theological  Seminar)' 


Rose,  Lucy  Atkinson.  Sharing  the  Word:  Preaching  in  the  Roundtable  Church. 
Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox,  1997.  Pp.  158.  $17.00. 

The  late  Lucy  Atkinson  Rose  taught  preaching  and  worship  at  Columbia 
Theological  Seminary.  Sharing  the  Word , a project  stemming  from  her 
doctoral  dissertation,  was  one  of  the  final  works  she  completed  before  her 
death  in  the  summer  of  1997.  Built  on  a penetrating  interpretation  and 
critique  of  recent  homiletical  development,  the  book  proposes  an  understand- 
ing of  preaching  crafted  around  the  idea  of  “conversation.”  As  indicated  by 
the  title,  Rose  suggests  that  we  understand  preaching  primarily  as  an  act  of 
sharing,  a “proposal  offered  to  the  community  of  faith  for  their  additions, 
corrections,  or  counterproposals.”  Seeking  to  overcome  traditional  hierarchi- 
cal models  of  preaching,  she  submits  to  the  ecclesial  and,  more  specifically, 
homiletical  community  what  she  describes  as  a communal,  non-hierarchical, 
personal,  inclusive,  and  scriptural  proposal. 

The  author  begins  her  work  with  a critical  review  of  three  dominant  models 
of  preaching,  which  she  describes  as  the  traditional,  kerygmatic,  and  transfor- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


3r4 

mative  (chaps.  1-3).  Treating  each  in  order  of  historical  development,  Rose 
analyzes  these  approaches  in  terms  of  their  particular  understanding  of 
sermonic  purpose,  content,  language,  and  form.  While  noting  the  important 
roles  these  approaches  have  played  — and  continue  to  play— in  the  life  of  the 
church,  she  remains  suspicious  of  any  understanding  of  preaching  which  1) 
perpetuates  a gap  between  preacher  and  hearer;  2)  assumes  the  empirical  or 
universal  character  of  “truth”;  3)  relies  on  a facile  confidence  in  the  clarity,  or 
value-neutral  character,  of  language;  and,  4)  assumes  that  preaching  intends 
primarily  to  answer  people’s  questions. 

In  response  to  the  current  homiletical  theories  available,  Rose  offers  a 
model  which  complements  rather  than  replaces  other  current  models,  and 
which  may  invite  more  people  to  sit  at  the  “homiletical  table.”  Her  proposal,  a 
conversational  homiletic,  rests  on  two  primary  convictions.  The  first  revolves 
around  the  assertion  that  congregations  and  pastors  are  equal  partners  in 
ministry  by  virtue  of  their  baptism  into  the  community  of  faith.  The  second 
assumes  that  all  language  is  limited  and  therefore  must  be  used  cautiously. 
These  twin  convictions  lead  Rose  to  rethink  the  four  elements  of  preaching 
she  identified  earlier. 

In  terms  of  sermonic  purpose , Rose  advocates  preaching  which  seeks  to 
interpret  life  experiences  in  a way  that  gathers  the  faithful  around  the  word, 
focuses  the  conversations  of  the  community,  and  thereby  builds  up  the 
community  of  faith.  Her  revision  of  preaching’s  content  involves  augmenting 
our  understanding  of  concepts  like  revelation,  Word,  and  kerygma  with  more 
tentative  words  such  as  interpretation,  proposal,  and  wager.  Such  designations 
not  only  reorient  us  to  the  ambiguity  of  life  and  language,  but  they  also  set  a 
more  modest  agenda  for  preaching  and,  most  importantly,  witness  to  the 
human  and  Christian  search  for  “meaning,”  rather  than  truth,  in  and  through 
our  life  experiences. 

One  of  the  most  provocative  portions  of  Rose’s  work  rests  in  her  call  to 
recognize  and  produce  sermonic  language  which  is  both  “confessional,” 
reflecting  the  ongoing  experiences  of  the  people  of  God,  and  “multivalent,” 
or  able  to  evoke  multiple  levels  of  meaning.  Such  language,  Rose  feels, 
interjects  into  preaching  a much-needed  honesty  about  human  limitation. 
Additionally,  it  also  “spotlights  the  community  of  faith  as  opposed  to  the 
preacher”  in  that  it  demands  the  participation  of  the  congregation  not  simply 
as  listeners  but  also  as  sermon-creators  and,  as  often  as  possible,  as  sermon- 
givers. 

Finally,  the  author  suggests  that  sermonic  form  should  follow  function  and 
thereby  be  more  conversational.  This  is  not  to  imply  the  constant  use  of 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3r5 


“dialogue”  sermons;  rather,  it  means  that  preachers  should  see  their  sermons 
as  “open  discourses”  which  invite  — and  depend  upon  — the  responses  of 
listeners  and  which,  in  fact,  then  also  listen  and  react  to  these  responses  in 
dialogical  fashion.  Most  helpful  to  this  type  of  preaching  are  two  particular 
forms;  the  first  is  a variation  of  inductive  and  narrative  preaching,  while  the 
second  revolves  around  story. 

All  in  all,  Rose  offers  a provocative  and,  at  several  points,  attractive 
proposal.  Although  her  criticism  of  previous  traditions  is  not  flawless  — 
perhaps  the  most  egregious  is  her  omission  of  Rudolf  Bultmann’s  influence  in 
“kerygmatic”  theology— her  criticisms  are  often  perceptive.  Further,  she 
offers  a constructive  proposal  which  not  only  reinvigorates  traditional  theo- 
logical categories  and  harvests  them  for  homiletical  use  (e.g.,  “the  priesthood 
of  all  believers”),  but  also  drives  preaching  more  deeply  into  the  actual 
realities  — as  ambiguous  and  suspect  as  ever— of  life  in  this  world.  Through- 
out, her  call  and  challenge  to  envision  preaching  as  a task  of  the  whole 
community  and,  therefore,  the  preacher’s  role  as  steward  of  the  office  — 
responsible  for  seeing  that  preaching  be  done,  not  necessarily  for  doing  all  of 
it— is  worth  pondering. 

But  while  Rose  offers  an  important  challenge,  she  offers  surprisingly  little 
help  in  imagining  what  a conversational  homiletic  might  actually  look  like. 
Beyond  rejecting  the  “dialogue  sermons”  of  the  70s,  she  proffers  almost  no 
insight  into  how  pastors  might  concretely'  share  the  task  of  the  preaching  with 
the  whole  community  of  saints. 

Further,  one  must  wonder  whether  the  gospel  is  inherently  “conversa- 
tional.” Certainly  it  invites,  expects,  and  takes  seriously  the  response  of  the 
listener.  But  whether  the  gospel  implies  the  possibility  of  a “conversation 
among  equals”  is  another  question  altogether.  While  this  criticism  need  not 
necessarily  perpetuate  the  gap  between  preacher  and  congregation  which 
Rose  laments,  it  does  imply  that  Rose  may  tread  perilously  close  to  jeopardiz- 
ing the  Reformation’s  insistence  that  preaching  witnesses  to  a gospel-reality 
which  exists  independently  of  the  reception  and  validation  of  the  community 
to  whom  it  is  proclaimed. 

Through  Sharing  the  Word , Rose  raises  and  addresses  a number  of  impor- 
tant questions  inherent  in  the  contemporary  task  of  proclamation.  We  will  do 
well  if  we  can,  as  she  asks,  carry  her  conversation  further  by  response,  critique, 
and  dialogue,  and  thereby  honor  her  memory  and  the  calling  to  which  she 
devoted  her  life. 


David  J.  Lose 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


3l6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Holderness,  Ginny  Ward,  with  Robert  S.  Hay.  Teaming  Up:  Shared  Leadership 
in  Y outh  Ministry . Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox,  1997.  Pp.  215.  $16.00. 

Until  the  1970s,  youth  ministry  in  the  United  States  served  as  a cradle  for 
future  leaders  in  the  church.  Christian  Endeavor  and  its  denominational 
clones,  the  Student  Christian  Movement  and  international  ecumenical  stu- 
dent assemblies,  denominational  legislative  youth  gatherings  and  ad  hoc  social 
justice  organizations  like  the  Student  National  Coordinating  Committee  all 
considered  youth  leadership  central  to  their  purposes.  Even  adult-led  para- 
church  ministries  like  Young  Life  and  Youth  for  Christ  made  peer  ministries 
important  components  of  their  programs,  a move  resulting  in  an  influx  of 
seminary  applications  in  the  past  twenty  years  from  people  with  parachurch 
backgrounds. 

In  the  1970s,  however,  the  bottom  began  to  fall  out  of  the  churches’  historic 
efforts  to  foster  leadership  in  adolescents.  Heeding  the  World  Council  of 
Churches’  admonishment  that  churches  should  integrate  youth  into  their 
total  mission  rather  than  segregate  youth  in  age-level  education  programs, 
mainline  denominations  rushed  to  disband  their  youth  departments  for  both 
symbolic  and  financial  reasons.  Unfortunately,  without  the  youth  depart- 
ments, training  and  resources  no  longer  existed  to  help  congregations  inte- 
grate youth  into  their  ministries,  and  youth  ministry  became  captive  to 
well-meaning  adults  and  good  instincts.  As  budgetary  pressure  increased, 
mainline  denominations  increasingly  viewed  youth  ministry  as  an  expendable 
line  item,  causing  the  Carnegie  Council  on  Adolescent  Development  to  call 
the  1 990s  “an  era  of  massive  cuts  in  funding,  resources,  and  personnel  for 
religious  youth  programs.” 

Enter  Ginny  Ward  Holderness,  whose  book  Youth  Ministry:  The  New  Team 
Approach  (1981)  was  less  new  than  simply  sane,  a voice  of  common  sense 
calling  the  “lone  ranger”  youth  ministry  paradigm— which  much  mainline 
Protestant  youth  ministry  had  devolved  into  by  this  time  — into  serious 
question.  Holderness’  premise  then,  as  now,  was  that  youth  ministry  ought  to 
involve  as  many  youth  as  possible  in  the  total  life  of  the  church.  This  vision 
required  youth  ministry  to  extend  beyond  a Sunday  night  program  and  to 
involve  a team  of  intentionally-formed  adult  leaders  rather  than  a single 
good-hearted  volunteer. 

Now  Holderness  expands  this  vision  in  Teaming  Up:  Shared  Leadership  in 
Youth  Ministiy,  an  utterly  helpful  primer  on  developing  ministry  teams  that 
involve  youth  as  well  as  adult  leadership  for  ministry  with  adolescents. 
Granted,  youth  ministry  has  charted  this  course  long  before  Holderness,  and 
youth  ministries  that  outlast  the  personal  charisma  of  their  adult  leaders  tend 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3i7 

to  survive  because  youth  have  been  intentionally  integrated  into  the  leader- 
ship. But  Holderness  recognizes  American  Protestantism’s  short  historical 
memory,  and  in  her  new  volume  (written  in  partnership  with  Robert  S.  Hay) 
she  implicitly  calls  us  back  to  our  roots  by  insisting  that  faithful  youth  ministry 
requires  youth  to  be  leaders  rather  than  adults  to  be  leading  in  their  stead. 

Holderness’  model  is  one  of  partnership,  in  which  adults  provide  a range  of 
opportunities  for  youth  leadership  and  mentor  youth  into  their  roles  as 
“leader”  rather  than  abandon  them  to  it.  She  calls  for  a biblical  imagination  to 
enact  the  youth-adult  partnership  model,  although  her  curriculum  offered 
here  does  little  to  demonstrate  how  theology  informs  the  actual  practice  of 
ministry.  Still,  this  kind  of  leadership-development  curriculum  is  hard  to 
come  by  (remember,  the  denominational  youth  departments  that  used  to 
produce  this  stuff  were  disbanded  thirty'  years  ago).  Holderness  comes  to  the 
rescue  with  welcome  guidance  for  practitioners  earnestly  seeking  ways  to 
implement  a model  of  shared  ownership  in  youth  ministry  and  elsewhere. 

The  “elsewhere”  issue,  in  fact,  is  my  one  quibble  with  this  volume:  it  cuts 
short  its  own  potential  for  influencing  ministry  beyond  what  is  narrowly 
defined  as  “youth  ministry'.”  After  all,  shared  ownership  is  a goal  for  all 
ministry,  not  youth  ministry  alone.  At  its  best,  youth  ministry  is  not  only 
about  youth;  it  is  about  ministry,  and  what  it  means  to  “be  church”  with  all 
people  whose  fundamental  humanity  is  perhaps  most  acutely  rendered,  and 
certainly  most  dramatically  enacted,  on  the  transitional  grounds  of  adoles- 
cence. Holderness’  best  chapters  are  those  describing  how  churches  help 
youth  become  leaders  and  identifying  the  various  roles  and  responsibilities  of 
the  adults  who  mentor  them.  Lurking  in  between  the  lines  is  a more  profound 
assumption:  youth  are  full  members  of  the  body  of  Christ,  called  as  all 
Christians  are  called  to  serve  others  in  congregation  and  community  out  of 
grateful  obedience  to  Christ. 

But  while  I can  quibble  with  Holderness,  I can’t  disagree  with  her.  Tea?ning 
Up  is  a helpful  addition  to  the  church  leader’s  bookshelf,  pastors  as  well  as 
youth  pastors,  lay  leader  as  well  as  youth  leader.  To  team  up  with  Teaming  Up  will 
strengthen  youth  ministry,  and  perhaps  the  ministry  of  the  church  along  with  it. 

Kenda  Creasy  Dean 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Watson,  Justin.  The  Christian  Coalition-.  Dreams  of  Restoration,  Demands  for 
Recognition.  New  York:  St.  Martin’s,  1997.  Pp.  292.  $35.00. 

When  Florida  State  University’s  Justin  Watson  focused  his  dissertation 
topic  on  the  Christian  Coalition,  he  was  fully  aware  that  the  advantages  of 


3i8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


narrow  focus  were  offset  by  its  volatility.  Having  scrupulously  examined  the 
distinctive  viewpoints  of  the  Christian  Coalition’s  top  leaders,  President  Pat 
Robertson  and  Executive  Director  Ralph  Reed,  his  anxieties  were  suddenly 
justified.  Pat  Robertson  moved  to  chair  the  board  and  Ralph  Reed  resigned  to 
start  his  own  campaign  consulting  firm. 

One  might  therefore  conclude  prematurely  that  this  book  was  extinct  at 
publication.  But,  thanks  to  the  quality  of  analysis  of  this  conservative  political 
coalition’s  formation  and  recent  history,  there  is  still  much  insight  to  be 
gained  from  its  balanced  perspective.  Pat  Robertson  continues  as  a dominat- 
ing voice;  Ralph  Reed  is  retained  on  the  Christian  Coalition’s  board,  although 
his  pragmatic,  moderating  voice  may  be  muffled. 

Watson  uses  the  umbrella  term  “evangelicalism”  to  include  such  subtypes 
as  fundamentalism  and  pentecostalism.  He  traces  the  evangelical  themes  of 
restoration  and  recognition  in  the  thinking  of  both  leaders.  Assembling  a 
critique  of  these  views  by  quoting  many  alternative  voices,  he  gives  Robertson 
and  Reed  a thoughtful,  fair  hearing,  too.  (Because  he  exclusively  examines  the 
Christian  Coalition,  he  does  not  provide  any  counterpoint  to  their  broadsides 
against  mainline-church  liberalism;  this  sometimes  seems,  therefore,  a bit 
unfair  to  the  mainline  churches.) 

“What  does  the  Christian  Coalition  want?”  Watson  asks.  It  wants  the 
restoration  and  renewal  of  the  cultural  influence  and  prestige  that  evangelical- 
ism once  enjoyed  in  American  society.  Robertson  applies  his  media-honed 
rhetoric  to  American  history,  placing  it  within  the  world  struggle  between 
God  and  Satan.  He  can  sound  reasonably  reassuring  that  Christians  in  politics 
will  simply  restore  a moral  strength  to  reinvigorate  the  greatness  of  America. 
Or  he  can  spew  out  invective  against  Marxism,  the  Illuminati,  the  Rockefellers 
and  Rothchilds,  the  Federal  Reserve  Board,  the  Council  on  Foreign  Rela- 
tions, the  Trilateral  Commission,  the  United  Nations,  Secular  Humanism, 
and  New  Age  religion— all  conspiratorial  agents  of  Satan  to  bring  about  a 
godless  socialist  one-world  government.  Watson  explores  Robertson’s  premil- 
lenialism  and  his  flirtation  with,  but  tentative  rejection  of,  “dominion  theol- 
ogy” as  formulated  by  Christian  reconstructionist  Roujas  J.  Rushdoony. 

Reed  also  seeks  a restoration  of  a moral  order  in  which  religious  voices  have 
“a  place  at  the  table.”  A political  pragmatist,  Reed  is  a much  more  careful 
historian,  who  does  not  participate  in  Robertson’s  dualization.  He  sees  a 
tension  between  new  and  old  institutions  rather  than  a conspiracy,  even 
acknowledging  evangelicals  contributed  to  their  own  marginalization  through 
unwise  tactics  and  acquiescence  to  secular  domination.  He  criticizes  the 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


3:9 


legacy  of  racism  that  is  still  evident  in  the  Christian  Coalition’s  almost 
all-white  membership. 

But  the  Christian  Coalition  wants  recognition,  too.  Here  Watson  describes 
the  evangelical  as  victim,  seeing  some  surprising  congruences  with  multicul- 
turalism.  An  invocation  of  oppression,  the  pursuit  of  a usable  history,  and  the 
development  of  a critique  of  oppression  join  a demand  for  public  revision  of  a 
demeaning  self-image.  This  demand  for  recognition  takes  two  contradictory' 
forms:  a demand  to  be  treated  equally  and  a demand  to  be  given  preferential 
treatment  on  the  basis  of  one’s  distinctive  qualities.  To  be  treated  equally,  to 
have  a seat  at  the  table,  is  to  acknowledge  the  equality  and  right  of  others  to  a 
seat  also.  This  admission  of  the  justice  of  pluralism  is  in  serious  tension  with 
restoration  of  a “Christian  nation.”  Furthermore,  insistence  upon  a distinc- 
tive, differential  recognition  when  acting  in  the  political  arena  sounds  suspi- 
ciously like  “interest  group”  politics,  which  both  leaders  disparage. 

Watson  resists  interpreting  these  inconsistencies  as  “stealth  politics”  and 
assumes  that  both  restoration  and  recognition  resonate  within  the  Christian 
Coalition  constituency.  These  incompatible  goals  will  become  increasingly 
problematic.  If  the  Christian  Coalition  attempts  to  buck  the  pluralist  tide  of 
American  society,  it  will  ultimately  fall  into  political  irrelevancy.  If  it  becomes 
one  more  interest  lobby  (even  though  staunchly  maintaining  “we  won’t 
become  like  them  because  we  aren’t  like  them”),  it  may  become  more 
successful.  Then,  he  concludes,  the  Christian  Coalition  will  face  the  decline  of 
idealism  brought  about  by  success  — and  will  wonder  one  day  to  what  they  had 
hoped  to  restore  the  nation. 

Peggy  L.  Shriver 
National  Council  of  Churches 
New  York,  NY 


Gripe,  Alan  G.  The  Interim  Pastor's  Manual.  Rev.  ed.  Louisville:  Geneva,  1997. 
Pp.  150.  $15.00. 

A quiet  revolution  has  taken  place  in  Presbyterian  ecclesiology  in  the  past 
two  decades.  Intentional,  trained,  and  certified  interim  ministry  has  devel- 
oped into  a vocational  specialty.  No  longer  “holding  things  together  until  a 
real  pastor  is  installed,”  the  interim  caretaker  image  has  been  replaced  with 
the  image  of  specialist  in  grief/confusion,  in  conflict  management,  in  healing 
betrayals  of  misconduct,  and  in  very  specific  developmental  tasks  that  signifi- 
cantly increase  the  likelihood  of  a successful  next  pastorate. 


32° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Years  of  painful  experience  created  the  felt  need  that  specialized  interim 
ministry  is  now  meeting.  Every  presbytery  has  stories  about  its  churches  with 
recurring  patterns  of  destructive  pastoral  relationships.  Long  before  The  Book 
of  Order  included  “interim”  as  a category  of  ministerial  service,  short  tenures 
following  long  ones  were  called  “unintentional  interims.”  The  time  between 
installed  pastors  is  now  being  viewed  as  the  opportunity  to  correct  harmful 
congregational  habits  and  to  loosen  the  well  packed  soil  of  a long  pastoral  path 
so  that  God  can  grow  something  new  there. 

To  that  end,  Alan  Gripe  offers  this  revised  edition  of  The  Interim  Pastor's 
Manual.  In  1987,  the  Vocation  Agency  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  (U.S.A.) 
was  rightly  concerned  to  explore  and  validate  interim  service  and  wisely  gave 
to  Alan  Gripe  the  challenge  of  summarizing  its  dimensions,  aspects,  and 
vision.  His  revision  is  even  better. 

As  the  vision  has  grown,  so  have  concepts  and  theories.  “Family  systems” 
theory  now  dominates  much  of  interim  training  and  practice.  Rabbi  Edwin  H. 
Friedman’s  Generation  to  Generation , published  in  1985,  has  become  a guiding 
light.  Alan  Gripe’s  ample  bibliography  has  many  titles  containing  references 
that  detail  various  roles  in  successful  interim  service. 

The  book  describes  work  for  all  the  cast  of  characters  within  interim 
experience.  There  are  tasks  for  the  congregation,  for  the  interim,  and  for  the 
Committee  on  Ministry.  There  are  descriptions  of  personal,  social,  and 
spiritual  needs,  and  even  a chapter  on  the  needs  of  an  interim’s  spouse!  The 
conceptual  growth  of  this  decade  is  well  summarized  in  this  book  and  in  its 
expansion  of  theories.  All  currently  recognized  aspects  of  interim  service  are 
depicted.  For  example,  the  congregation’s  traditional  five  developmental  tasks 
are  specifically  supplemented  by  five  process  tasks  for  the  interim. 

While  these  roles  are  helpfully  addressed  in  clear  concepts,  they  also  are 
couched  in  terms  of  strategies  and  options.  The  teeter-totter  chart  with 
maintenance  on  one  side  and  change  on  the  other  graphically  portrays  the 
balance  in  which  every  thoughtful  interim  daily  analyzes,  probes,  and  suggests 
tactics  for  the  church  in  transition.  The  appendices  contain  a remarkable 
array  of  useful  options  from  liturgies  for  entry  and  exit  to  contracts  and  review 
forms. 

Alan  Gripe  repeats  the  carefully  guarded  injunction  that  the  interim  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  search  for  a new  installed  pastor.  This  is  true  for  the 
selection  process  but  not  true  for  the  search  process  that  is  sensitive  to  and 
aware  of  identity  issues.  The  Philadelphia  Presbytery  uses  its  interims  as 
Committee  on  Ministry  representatives  to  the  pastoral  search  committee.  No 
one  is  more  aware  of  change  in  an  interim  period. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


32 1 

Alan  Gripe  has  written  a complete  summary  of  developing  interim  ministra- 
tion. It  is  not  a substitute  for  training.  But  it  is  a fine  overview  for  assessing 
this  calling  in  our  denomination. 

Ronald  T.  Allin 
Decatur,  IL 


Jacobs,  Janet  Liebman,  and  Donald  Capps,  eds.  Religion , Society , and  Psycho- 
analysis: Readings  in  Contemporary  Theory.  Boulder:  Westview,  1997.  Pp.  282. 
$65.00/52 1.95. 

The  editors  of  the  volume  are  Janet  Liebman  Jacobs  and  Donald  Capps. 
Jacobs  teaches  Women’s  Studies  at  the  University  of  Colorado.  In  her 
chapter,  she  proposes  that  Freud’s  own  social  marginality  as  a Jew  may  have 
been  projected  in  his  unreflective  tendency  to  marginalize  women.  Capps 
teaches  pastoral  theology  at  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  and  has  written 
comprehensively  on  the  interaction  between  the  subjects  listed  in  the  title  of 
this  book.  He  describes  Erik  Erikson’s  version  of  how  inner  fears  of  the  child 
are  still  operative  in  adult  anxieties,  with  special  attention  to  the  “inner  space” 
controversy  feminists  have  with  Erikson. 

In  this  short  review  it  is  not  possible  to  discuss  each  of  the  fourteen  essays. 
To  read  them  all  is  to  take  a post-graduate  seminar  in  vital  human  and 
religious  questions.  These  are  questions  raised  by  the  creative  continuance  of 
reflective  thinking  in  the  broadly  analytic  tradition.  One  will  be  challenged  to 
digest  rich  interpretations  of  Karen  Horney,  Melanie  Klein,  Heinz  Kohut, 
Alice  Miller,  Jacques  Lacan,  and  Julia  Kristeva. 

It  is  hard  to  discover  an  integrating  flow  amid  the  themes  in  the  essays.  The 
analytic  concerns  go  in  disparate  directions.  Some  focus  on  the  father,  some 
on  the  mother.  Some  concentrate  on  object  relations,  others  still  work  with 
the  oedipal.  Some  turn  to  the  inner,  others  to  the  outer.  Some  build  on  the 
late  Freud  where  abuse  and  incest  are  fantasy,  others  on  the  early  Freud  where 
it  is  historical.  Some  make  much  of  language,  others  much  of  play.  For  some, 
narcissism  is  the  key  to  health,  for  others,  it  is  a sign  of  illness. 

My  hunch  is,  however,  that  they  all  contribute  to  a dynamic  interpretation 
of  religion  in  relation  to  human  experience.  Capp’s  predecessor  at  Princeton, 
Seward  Hiltner,  likewise  paid  much  attention  to  a dynamic  perspective  in  his 
pioneer  dialogue  between  human  science  and  religion.  He  saw  that  Freud  and 
his  tradition  led  us  to  dynamic  understandings.  A dynamic  view  of  the  human, 
including  the  religious  human,  is  a “thick,”  that  is,  complex,  reading  of 
experience.  It  is  about  “depth,”  about  unresolved  tensions,  always  only 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


322 

partially  understood.  It  is  about  multiple  levels  of  language  and  meaning.  It  is 
about  various  dimensions  of  context— internal,  social,  and  anthropological.  It 
is  about  the  flows  of  process  and  the  emergence  of  development.  It  is,  at  once, 
about  the  real  and  unreal.  Thus,  religion  and  its  theology  can  no  longer  be 
accurate  and  honest  in  its  reading  of  experience  by  endeavoring  only  to  be 
literal,  or  only  simple,  once  the  virus  of  dynamic  psychology  has  infected  our 
perspective. 

Furthermore,  in  these  essays  the  dynamic  has  a salvific  thrust.  The  thera- 
pists, philosophers,  and  religious  thinkers  in  these  chapters  tend  to  be 
concerned  with  understanding  the  essential  human  condition  in  order  that 
some  kind  of  improvement  for  it  can  be  wrought.  Of  course,  Freud  began  this 
tendency  by  seeking  to  analyze  negatively  the  religious  in  order  to  heal,  first 
patients  and  then  civilization.  Yet,  as  Freud  knew,  the  “truth”  of  religion  is 
not  separate  from  the  function  of  religion. 

Those  who  tackle  this  challenging  book  will  be  refreshed  in  their  therapeu- 
tic and  theological  insight  about  humanity.  Advanced  seminary  students, 
pastors,  theological  and  religion  professors,  therapists,  and  all  genuinely 
concerned  about  who  we  are  will  be  interested  in  it. 

Leland  E.  Elhard 
Trinity  Lutheran  Seminary 


Moran,  Gabriel.  Showing  How:  The  Act  of  Teaching.  Valley  Forge:  Trinity 
Press  International,  1997.  Pp.  250.  $20.00. 

Gabriel  Moran,  a teacher  with  thirty-nine  consecutive  years  in  the  class- 
room and  author  of  many  books  on  education,  has,  in  Showing  How,  written  a 
provocative  and,  to  this  teacher  of  forty-four  years,  an  absorbing  book. 

It  is  provocative  because  Moran  has  written  of  teaching  from  an  alternative 
assumption  about  learning:  Human  beings  learn  because  they  are  taught  by 
other  human  beings,  by  the  religious  tradition,  by  the  marvels  of  creation, 
and,  ultimately,  by  the  divine  teacher.  Teaching,  in  this  understanding,  is  not 
confined  to  the  classroom  but  is  seen  as  a mysterious  activity  in  human  life. 
The  fundamental  correlation  of  “show  how”  is  “to  live.”  Showing  someone 
how  to  live  must  eventually  include  how  to  die.  To  teach  is  to  do  just  that:  to 
show  someone  how  to  live  and  how  to  die. 

The  book  is  absorbing  because  Moran  is  so  well-versed  in  the  classics  in 
education  and  in  the  philosophers’  attempts  to  describe  what  teaching  and 
learning  are  all  about;  moreover,  he  presents  what  he  knows  in  a lucid, 
readable  manner. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


323 

When  he  presents  the  goal  of  teaching— to  teach  by  design  — he  speaks  of 
the  teacher’s  task  as  working  with  the  student  and  the  environment  to 
improve  the  present  design.  Although  it  is  a step  in  the  right  direction,  it  is  no 
longer  enough  to  know  that  people  have  multiple  intelligences,  that  not  all  of 
us  are  “smart”  in  the  same  way.  Each  of  us  has  established  a pattern  or  design 
by  which  we  approach,  enter,  and  usually  reconstruct  knowledge  and  experi- 
ence. The  teacher  intentionally  studies  the  design  of  the  students  and  of  the 
shaping  factors  in  the  environment  and  sets  about  changing  the  design. 
Moran  uncovers  something  that  many  who  have  taught  “know”  at  some  level, 
but  that  not  enough  have  put  into  action.  Further,  his  insistent  and  persuasive 
argument  that  we  learn  with  our  bodies  as  much  as  with  our  minds  speaks  a 
significant  word  to  our  culture  that  sees  without  experiencing,  that  values  a 
separation  of  mind  and  heart  and  a compartmentalizing  of  how  we  learn  in 
different  contexts.  Moran  points  out  that  animals  teach  without  language  and 
that  we  learn  to  swim  when  We  begin  to  know  what  the  water  has  to  teach  us. 

Moran  identifies  “families  of  language”  used  in  teaching,  components  of 
each  family  linked  by  particular  qualities.  For  teaching  with  an  end  in  view , he 
discusses  story-telling,  delivering  a lecture,  preaching  a sermon.  For  teaching 
to  reviove  obstacles,  he  mentions  praise  and  condemnation  (with  the  assumption 
that  praise  is  given  to  the  natural  environment  and  human  accomplishment, 
and  condemnation  to  anything  that  destroys  that),  welcome  and  thanks, 
confession  and  forgiveness,  mourning  and  comfort.  In  this  family  of  languages 
the  teacher  and  the  learner  have  interchangeable  roles.  For  teaching  the 
conversation  (which  presupposes  the  previous  mo  language  families  because,  in 
the  first  two,  speech  directs  bodily  language  and  is  contiguous  with  bodily- 
ness and  in  this  third  set  we  find  speech  about  speech),  he  lifts  up  dramatic 
performances,  dialectical  discussion,  and  academic  criticism. 

Moran’s  book  is  a gift  to  the  imagination  and  to  the  knowledge  of  teachers 
in  the  pulpit,  the  classroom,  the  committee  meeting,  the  counseling  session, 
and  wherever  there  is  awareness  and  intent  to  show  people  of  any  age  how  to 
live  and  how  to  die.  A willingness  to  play  with  his  ideas  and  convictions  will 
persuade  the  reader  that  Moran  the  teacher  knows  something  of  the  designs 
by  which  we  teach  and  learn  and  is  intent  upon  offering  us  a richer  design  that 
will  activate  our  minds  and  imaginations,  our  feelings  and  our  purposes.  T he 
book  is  analogous  to  the  water’s  way  of  teaching  someone  to  swim;  to  be  with 
Moran  and  in  his  thought  is  to  know  our  bodies,  minds,  and  spirits  to  be  both 
challenged  and  supported  as  we  try  to  be  faithful  to  the  holy  calling  of  teaching. 

Freda  A.  Gardner 
Princeton  rheological  Seminary 


324 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Graham,  Billy.  Just  As  1 Anv.  The  Autobiography  of  Billy  Graham.  San  Francisco: 
HarperSanFrancisco,  1997.  Pp.  760.  $28.50. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  ambitious  autobiographies  of  a Christian  leader  in 
almost  any  generation.  It  reads  like  a travelogue,  and  a holy  one  at  that!  To 
supply  an  accounting  of  every  fact  and  detail  of  one  person’s  lifetime  of 
Christian  ministry  and  evangelism  requires  a diarist  of  unusual  care  and 
wonderfully  retentive  memory;  such  is  Billy  Graham.  Moreover,  despite  the 
variety  and  breadth  of  the  activities  of  the  Billy  Graham  Evangelistic  Associa- 
tion and  its  witness  before  the  world  throughout  the  latter  half  of  this  century, 
in  all  these  760  pages  one  does  not  lose  sight  of  the  principal  evangelist  and  his 
inner  capacity  to  sustain  enthusiasm  during  his  exhaustive  trek  across  the 
globe,  nor  of  the  steady  adherence  and  devotion  of  a faithful  staff  of  workers 
and  planners,  nor  of  that  sense  of  urgency  to  present  a simple  gospel  message 
to  millions  of  hearers  in  practically  every  time  zone  of  our  planet. 

From  reading  this  volume,  how  does  one  characterize  the  Graham  phenom- 
enon that  is  unparalleled  in  the  annals  of  Christian  evangelism?  It  is  no 
simplification  to  say  that  the  secret  lies  in  the  man  and  his  gospel  or,  more 
clearly,  what  the  gospel  has  made  of  the  man.  In  his  very  nature  lies  an 
impelling  constraint  to  reach  people  within  the  context  of  their  national  and 
social  environments  and  to  use  every  respectable  pretext  to  get  a hearing  for 
the  gospel— whether  it  be  in  Europe,  Russia,  Asia,  the  Americas,  Africa,  or 
down  under  in  New  Zealand  and  Australia.  Some  of  the  more  exciting 
chapters  of  this  saga  have  to  do  with  excursions  taken  where  expectations  were 
not  very  high,  for  example  in  China,  North  Korea,  and  lands  then  behind  the 
barriers  of  the  Iron  Curtain. 

Graham  never  compromised  in  his  worldview  of  evangelism  and  that  vision 
shaped  his  over  fifty  crusades  at  home  and  abroad.  To  read  his  account  leads 
one  to  cite  the  words  of  Shakespeare  (in  an  entirely  different  context):  he  doth 
bestride  the  narrow  world  like  a Colossus  (Julius  Caesar , I,  ii,  27).  Moreover, 
his  popular  appeal  drew  a response  not  from  any  restrictive  set  but  from  the 
many  levels  of  social,  cultural,  and  administrative  responsibilities.  Rudyard 
Kipling  would  have  likened  him  a la  these  lines  from  his  poem  If.  “If  you  can 
walk  with  crowds  and  keep  your  virtue/  or  walk  with  kings  — nor  lose  the 
common  touch.”  Such  sets  Graham  apart  from  many  of  the  modern  pseudo- 
evangelists, especially  in  the  matter  of  the  man  and  his  message  being 
inseparable. 

We,  who  have  lived  during  Graham’s  remarkable  career,  who  have  listened 
to  him  in  many  of  his  crusades,  are  simply  being  natural  when  we  ask,  “What 
is  his  legacy  to  our  generation  of  ‘church  people’?”  There  are  religious 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


325 


pundits  who  dismiss  any  long-term  benefits  front  crusades  marked  by  one- 
sided dialogue,  quick  encounters  that  lack  serious  exchanges  of  mind  with 
mind,  and  emotional  decisions  precipitated  by  mere  crowd  psychology.  As 
one  of  Graham’s  own  advisers  once  said  to  him:  “Billy,  if  you  just  puddle  jump 
from  crusade  to  crusade  all  over  the  world,  you’ll  never  accomplish  what  you 
could  and  should.”  That  had  some  sense  in  it.  However,  although  he  had  only 
slim  encounters  with  labor,  industry,  and  theological  giants,  yet  his  counsel 
was  sought  by  leaders  in  positions  of  authority  both  high  and  low.  He  never 
presumed  to  be  a coach  regarding  public  policy  (political,  industrial,  or 
cultural).  His  was  a concern  for  human  attitudes  that  shape  strategy  through  a 
goodly  blend  of  prayer  and  listening  to  a voice  and  will  above  and  beyond  his 
own.  He  was  a person  talking  to  persons,  and  he  did  so  with  courage  and  a full 
measure  of  integrity  that  marked  his  beliefs  and  carried  his  crusades  flawlessly 
through  a whole  generation.  As  this  reviewer  has  spoken  in  hundreds  of 
American  churches,  it  has  not  been  unusual  for  a woman  or  man  to  say  to  me: 
“I  was  converted  from  unbelief  to  this  church  at  a local  Billy  Graham  crusade 
years  ago.”  Such  event-statistics  cannot  count,  but  they  attest  to  what  the 
Apostle  John  said  long  ago:  “The  wind  blows  where  it  chooses,  and  you  hear 
the  sound  of  it,  but  you  do  not  know  where  it  comes  from  or  where  it  goes.  So 
it  is  with  everyone  who  is  born  of  the  Spirit”  (Jn.  3:8). 

Donald  Macleod 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Tate,  Stan.  Jumping  Skyward.  Heron,  Montana:  Cabinet  Crest,  1995.  Pp.  185. 
$1 1.95. 

Stan  Tate  has  an  unusual  view  of  his  parachuting  experience  as  an  Idaho 
“smoke  jumper.”  He  believes  that  the  act  of  jumping  out  of  airplanes  down 
into  forest  fires  actually  “elevated”  him.  He  was  “jumping  skyward.” 

Tate  is  a graduate  of  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  (class  of ’58)  and  has 
served  for  many  years  as  an  Episcopal  priest,  mostly  outside  of  the  traditional 
parish  setting.  He  composed  this  slightly  fictionalized  autobiography  over  the 
last  several  years  while  serving  as  a bioethicist  in  Moscow,  Idaho.  In  it  he  has 
distilled  insights  drawn  from  years  of  daredevil  fire  fighting  into  seven 
chapters,  each  focusing  on  a different  blaze. 

This  is  a hook  about  smoke  jumping,  but  is  is  also  about  discovering  the 
fingerprint  of  the  Creator  and  the  universal  spirituality  that  transcends 
religious  differences.  Tate  has  been  able  to  fashion  seemingly  incompatible 


326 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


worlds  into  a sensitive  and  engaging  narrative.  Rugged  wilderness  fire  fight- 
ing is  joined  with  placid  spirituality. 

As  one  proceeds  through  the  narrative,  one  gains  a heightened  sense  of 
gratitude  for  God’s  natural  cathedral.  Among  the  vignettes  included  are 
unique  meditative  experiences  in  the  Idaho  wilderness.  Francis  of  Assisi’s 
prayers  drew  wild  birds,  but  here  prayers  draw  wild  moose  and  bobcats! 
Ultimately  the  hero  of  the  story,  Ken  Shuler,  or  “Hawk,”  makes  a stunning 
sacrifice,  somewhat  reminiscent  of  the  One  who  loved  the  lakes  and  moun- 
tains of  the  Holy  Land. 

Of  particular  interest  to  some  will  be  the  extensive  theological  and  scrip- 
tural reference  notes  located  in  the  back  of  the  book.  These  could  be  helpful 
for  a small  discussion  group. 

Jumping  Skyward  is  a profound  and  highly  readable  book.  In  recognition  of 
this,  it  recently  won  the  Gem  State  Award  at  the  Northwest  Christian 
Writers’  Conference  as  their  best  book  of  the  year.  It  should  be  of  great 
interest  to  a wide  range  of  readers,  front  wildlife  and  nature  enthusiasts  to 
those  concerned  with  spirituality. 

William  O.  Harris 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Metzger,  Bruce  Manning,  Reminiscences  of  an  Octogenarian.  Peabody:  Hendrik- 
son,  1997.  Pp.  242.  $24.95. 

All  octogenarians  have  reminiscences  but  few  find  publishers.  Octogenar- 
ian Bruce  Manning  Metzger  belongs  among  the  exceptions  because  he  is  in 
extraordinary  measure  “a  learned  man,  powerful  in  the  scriptures”  (Acts 
18:24).  His  lasting  contributions  to  general  Bible  readers  and  specialized 
biblical  scholars  alike  lie  not  in  the  significant  but  derivative  labors  of  New 
Testament  commentator  or  theologian,  but  in  the  foundational  and  judicious 
task  of  determining  the  actual  words  of  the  New  Testament  text,  both  in  the 
Greek  original  and  in  English  translation. 

This  remarkable  achievement  will  attract  a broad  readership  to  three  core 
chapters  of  his  reminiscences:  chapter  6 (“The  Bible  Societies’  Greek  New 
Testament”),  chapter  7 (“Translating  the  Bible:  The  Revised  Standard 
Version”),  and  chapter  8 (“Translating  the  Bible:  The  New  Revised  Standard 
Version”).  The  “inside  story”  of  these  projects  is  meticulously  recorded  by 
this  leading  participant  in  each.  Where  else  could  one  find  personal  and 
authoritative  accounts  of  their  life,  from  inception  to  completion,  coupled 
with  humanizing  anecdotes?  The  latter  range  from  the  North  Carolina  pastor 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


327 


who  publicly  burned  with  a blowtorch  a copy  of  the  RSV  (“A  heretical, 
communist-inspired  Bible,”  he  called  it),  and  sent  the  ashes  to  the  convener  of 
the  translators,  to  the  evening  when  the  New  Testament  section  preparing 
the  NRSV  lost  track  of  time,  found  themselves  locked  in  the  Princeton 
Seminar)7  library  for  the  night,  and  had  to  climb  out  of  a workroom  window, 
one-by-one! 

Rounding  out  this  core  are  two  related  chapters  of  more  than  passing 
interest.  The  first  (chapter  io)  deals  with  the  sensitive  issue  of  condensing  the 
Bible.  As  the  general  editor  of  The  Reader's  Digest  Bible,  it  was  Metzger’s 
responsibility  not  only  to  prepare  brief,  non-technical  introductions  to  the 
Old  and  New  Testaments  and  to  each  individual  book,  but  also  to  advise  the 
editors  which  block  cuts  could  be  made  in  biblical  books!  With  customary 
candor,  Metzger  shares  a sampling  of  both  vitriolic  and  appreciative  responses 
to  this  endeavor.  The  other  (chapter  15)  recounts  the  story  of  The  Oxford 
Companion  to  the  Bible.  The  task  of  editing  this  comprehensive  Bible  dictionary 
stretched  over  nine  years,  and  in  England,  its  actual  launching  took  place  at  a 
party  held  in  the  Jerusalem  Chamber  of  Westminster  Abbey. 

Having  met  this  famous  American  New  Testament  scholar  via  his  participa- 
tion in  these  Bible  projects,  many  readers  may  wish  to  know  something  of  his 
personal  side.  Metzger  obliges  with  four  chapters  devoted  to  his  formative 
years.  Born  to  Maurice  R.  Metzger  and  Anna  Manning  Metzger  on  February7 
9,  1914,  he  writes  appreciatively  of  his  Pennsylvania-Dutch  heritage.  Follow- 
ing graduation  from  Middletown  High  School  (with  four  years  of  Fatin)  he 
chose  his  father’s  alma  mater,  Febanon  Valley  College.  There  “for  some 
reason”  he  elected  to  meet  the  college’s  foreign  language  requirement  by 
enrolling  in  the  elementary  course  in  classical  Greek  grammar.  Whatever  the 
reason,  that  decision  became  the  door  through  which  he  entered  the  world  of 
Greek  grammars  and  lexica,  New  Testament  textual  criticism,  the  synoptic 
problem,  and  the  Apostolic  Fathers,  together  with  the  mastery  of  Fatin, 
German,  and  French. 

After  college,  Metzger  continued  his  studies  at  Princeton  Theological 
Seminary,  whose  George  F.  Collord  Professsor  of  New  Testament  Emeritus 
he  remains  today,  after  a distinguished  teaching  career  there  of  forty-six  years 
(1938-1984).  His  personal  life  was  blessed  by  marriage  to  Isobel  Elizabeth 
Mackay,  and  his  professional  life  was  shaped  by  postgraduate  studies  at 
Princeton  University  and  the  University  of  Chicago,  and  ordination  as  an 
evangelist  by  the  Presbyterian  Church  (U.S.A.).  Resident  in  Princeton,  he 
traveled  the  nation  and  the  world  to  become  an  internationally  recognized 
biblical  authority. 


328 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


The  book’s  remaining  chapters  are  a smorgasbord  of  offerings.  The  reader 
uninterested  in  The  International  Greek  New  Testament  Project  or  the  saga 
of  the  Yonan  Codex  may  enjoy  Metzger’s  experience  with  literary  forgeries, 
his  reflections  on  sabbaticals,  or  some  of  his  vexations  as  an  author. 

Reminiscences  of  an  Octogenarian  is  part  autobiography,  part  historical  record, 
and  part  sourcebook.  It  is  the  engaging  story  of  an  outstanding  teacher, 
lecturer,  scholar,  author,  editor,  translator,  churchman,  and  Christian  gentle- 
men, the  days  of  whose  years  form  a fascinating  and  informative  introduction 
to  the  notable  projects  and  persons  of  twentieth-century  biblical  studies. 

James  I.  Cook 
Western  Theological  Seminary 


INDEX  TO  VOLUME  19 

!998 


Articles  and  Sermons 

Adam,  A.K.M.  “Crossing  Over,  Pressing  On”  236 

Carter,  William  G.  “Singing  a New  Song”  40 

Charlesworth,  James  H.  “The  Dead  Sea  Scrolls:  Fifty  Years  of  Discovery  and 

Controversy”  116 

Clark,  Peter  Yuichi.  “Faith  and  Identity  in  Nisei  Self-Narratives”  279 

Faculty  Publications  190 

Gillespie,  Thomas  W.  “And,  Then,  There’s  Jesus”  233 

. “Theological  Friendships”  1 

LaRue,  Jr.,  CleoJ.  “Exceptional  Ambition”  9 

Migliore,  Daniel  L.  “The  Missionary  God  and  the  Missionary  Church”  14 

Mouw,  Richard  J.  “Some  Reflections  on  Sphere  Sovereignty”  160 

Rorem,  Paul.  “Empathy  and  Evaluation  in  Medieval  Church  History  and 

Pastoral  Ministry:  A Lutheran  Reading  of  Pseudo-Dionysius”  99 

Springsted,  Eric  O.  “Theology  and  Spirituality:  Or,  Why  Religion  Is  Not 

Critical  Reflection  on  Religious  Experience”  143 

Stendahl,  Krister.  “Qumran  and  Supersessionism— And  the  Road  Not  Taken”  134 

Tel,  Martin.  “Truthfulness  in  Church  Music”  26 

Thompson,  Marianne  Meye.  “Reflections  on  Worship  in  the  Gospel  of  John”  259 

Ulanov,  Ann  Belford.  “The  Gift  of  Consciousness”  242 

Weathers,  Janet  L.  “The  Protection  of  God’s  Darkness”  183 

Book  Reviews 

Allegretti,  Joseph.  The  Lawyer's  Calling:  Christian  Faith  and  Legal  Practice  (Kelly 

D.  Reese)  227 

Anderson,  Herbert,  and  Freda  A.  Gardner.  Living  Alone  (Cynthia  M.  Camp- 
bell) 65 

Appleby,  R.  Scott,  ed.  Spokesmen  for  the  Despised:  Fundamentalist  Leaders  of  the 

Middle  East  (Benjamin  M.  Weir)  225 

Augsberger,  David  W.  Helping  People  Forgive  (James  N.  Lapsley)  66 

Bloesch,  Donald  G.  Jesus  Christ:  Savior  and  Lord  (Gabriel  Fackre)  222 

Bondi,  Roberta  C.  In  Ordinary  Time:  Healing  the  Wounds  of  the  Heart  (Mary 

Forman)  75 

Boyd,  Stephen  B.,  W.  Merle  Longwood,  and  Mark  W.  Muesse,  eds.  Redeeming 
Men:  Religion  and  Masculinities  (Robert  C.  Dykstra)  69 

Brueggemann,  Walter.  Theology  of  the  Old  Testa?nent:  Testimony,  Dispute, 
Advocacy  (Michael  S.  Moore)  2 1 2 


33° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Capps,  Donald.  Men,  Religion,  and  Melancholia:  James,  Otto,  Jung,  and  Erikson 

(Richard  A.  Hutch)  52 

Carl,  William  J.,  Jr.,  ed.  Graying  Gracefully:  Preaching  to  Older  Adults  (James  N. 

Lapsley)  8 1 

Carr,  Anne,  and  Mary  Stewart  van  Leeuwen,  eds.  Religion,  Feminism,  and  the 

Family  (Christie  Cozad  Neuger)  203 

Charry,  Ellen  T.  By  the  Renewing  of  Your  Minds:  The  Pastoral  Function  of 

Christian  Doctrine  (William  S.  Babcock)  294 

Chesebrough,  David  B.  Clergy  Dissent  in  the  Old  South,  1830-1865  (James  H. 

Moorhead)  88 

Cowdell,  Scott.  Is  Jesus  Unique?  A Study  of  Recent  Christology  (Roch  Kereszty)  58 
Cross,  F.L.,  and  E.A.  Livingstone,  eds.  The  Oxford  Dictionary  of  the  Christian 

Church,  3rd  ed.  (Paul  Rorem)  90 

DeVries,  Dawn.  Jesus  Christ  in  the  Preaching  of  Calvin  and  Schleiermacher  (Philip 
W.  Butin)  59 

Doehring,  Carrie.  Taking  Care:  Monitoring  Power  Dynamics  and  Relational 

Boundaries  in  Pastoral  Care  and  Counseling  (Donald  Capps)  73 

Douglass,  Jane  Dempsey  and  James  F.  Kay,  eds.  Women,  Gender,  and  Christian 

Community  (Mary  Anona  Stoops)  55 

English,  Donald.  An  Evangelical  Theology  of  Preaching  (Carol  M.  Noren)  82 

Ford,  Richard  Q.  The  Parables  of  Jesus:  Recovering  the  Art  of  Listening  (Donald 

Capps)  300 

Gaventa,  Beverly  Roberts.  First  and  Second  Thessalonians  (Calvin  J.  Roetzel)  297 

Gerkin,  Charles  V.  An  Introduction  to  Pastoral  Care  0ames  N.  Lapsley)  303 

Gonzalez,  Catherine  Gunsalus  and  Justo  L.  Gonzalez.  Revelation  (M.  Eugene 

Boring)  63 

Graham,  Larry  Kent.  Discovering  Images  of  God:  Narratives  of  Care  Among 

Lesbians  and  Gays  (Peggy  Way)  208 

Graham,  Billy.  Just  As  I Am:  The  Autobiography  of  Billy  Graham  (Donald 
Macleod)  324 

Gripe,  Alan  G.  The  Interim  Pastor's  Manual,  rev  ed.  (Ronald  T.  Allin)  319 

Hays,  Richard  B.  The  Moral  Vision  of  the  New  Testament:  Community,  Cross,  New 

Creation:  A Contemporary  Introduction  to  New  Testament  Ethics  (Robin  Scroggs)  2 1 7 

Holderness,  Ginny  Ward,  and  Robert  S.  Hay.  Teaming  Up:  Shared  Leadership 

in  Youth  Ministry  (Kenda  Creasy  Dean)  3 1 6 

Isasi-Diaz,  Ada  Marfa.  Mujerista  Theology:  A Theology  for  the  Twenty-First 

Century  (Carlos  F.  Cardoza-Orlandi)  224 

Jacobs,  Janet  Liebman,  and  Donald  Capps,  eds.  Religion,  Society,  and  Psychoanaly- 
sis: Readings  in  Contemporary  Theory  (Leland  E.  Elhard)  321 

Jenni,  Ernst,  and  Claus  Westermann,  trans.  Mark  E.  Biddle.  Theological  Lexicon 

of  the  Old  Testament  (Brent  A.  Strawn)  2 1 5 


INDEX  331 

Krueger,  David,  with  Donald  W.  Shriver,  Jr.  and  Laura  L.  Nash.  The  Business 

Corporation  and  Productive  Justice  (Gordon  K.  Douglass)  91 

Leith,  John  H.  Crisis  in  the  Church:  The  Plight  of  Theological  Education  (James  E. 

Loder)  309 

Long,  Thomas  G.  Hebrews  (Robert  L.  Brawley)  62 

Matthew  (A.K.M.  Adam)  219 

McClendon,  James  W.,  Jr.  Making  Gospel  Sense  to  a Troubled  Church  (Sally  A. 

Brown)  229 

McKenzie,  Alyce  M.  Preaching  Proverbs:  Wisdom  for  the  Pulpit  (Dave  Bland)  84 

Mercadante,  Linda  A.  Victims  and  Sinners:  Spiritual  Roots  of  Addiction  and 

Recovery  (Elizabeth  Brishcar)  305 

Metzger,  Bruce  Manning.  Reminiscences  of  an  Octogenarian  (James  T.  Cook)  326 

Moessner,  Jeanne  Stevenson,  ed.  Through  the  Eyes  of  Women:  Insights  for 

Pastoral  Care  (Antoinette  Goodwin)  7 1 

Moltmann,  Jurgen.  The  Cotning  of  God:  Christian  Eschatology  (Gabriel  Fackre)  56 

Moran,  Gabriel.  Showing  How:  The  Act  of  Teaching  (Freda  A.  Gardner)  322 

Neuger,  Christie  Cozad,  and  James  Newton  Poling.  The  Care  of  Men  (James  E. 

Dittes)  68 

O’Donovan,  Oliver.  The  Desire  of  Nations:  Rediscovering  the  Roots  of  Political 

Theology  (Charles  C.  West)  94 

Palmer,  Earl  F.  The  Book  That  Jatnes  Wrote  (Alyce  M.  McKenzie)  308 

Pelikan,  Jaroslav.  Maty  through  the  Centuries:  Her  Place  in  the  History  of  Culture 

(Laurel  Broughton)  85 

Placher,  William  C.  The  Domestication  of  Transcendence:  How  Modern  Thinking 
about  God  Went  Wrong  (Gregory  S.  Cootsona)  220 

Rediger,  G.  Lloyd.  Clergy  Killers:  Guidance  for  Pastors  and  Congregations  under 
Attack  (David  W.  Augsberger)  3 1 2 

Richardson,  Ronald  W.  Creating  a Healthier  Church:  Family  Systems  Theory , 
Leadership , and  Congregational  Life  (J.  Randall  Nichols)  77 

Robert,  Dana  L.  American  Women  in  Mission:  A Social  History  of  Their  Thought 
and  Practice  (Alan  Neely)  87 

Rose,  Lucy  Atkinson.  Sharing  the  Word:  Preaching  in  the  Roundtable  Church 

(David  L.  Lose)  313 

Savage,  John  S.  Listening  and  Caring  Skills  in  Ministry:  A Guide  for  Pastors , 

Counselors , and  Small  Group  Leaders  (Deborah  van  Deusen  Hunsinger)  78 

Seitz,  Christopher  R.  Word  Without  End:  The  Old  Testament  as  Abiding 

Theological  Witness  (Ralph  Klein)  306 

Stackhouse,  Max  L.  Covenant  and  Commitments:  Faith,  Family,  and  Economic 

Life  (William  Johnson  Everett)  201 

Streete,  Gail  Corrington.  The  Strange  Woman:  Power  and  Sex  in  the  Bible 

(Christine  Roy  Yoder)  210 


332 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Switzer,  David  K.  Coming  Out  as  Parents:  You  and  Your  Homosexual  Child 

(Joretta  L.  Marshall)  206 

Tate,  Stan.  Jumping  Skyward  (William  O.  Harris)  325 

van  Huyssteen,  J.  Wentzel.  Essays  in  Postfoundationalist  Theology  (Roger  Trigg)  295 
Wainwright,  Geoffrey.  For  Our  Salvation  (Leanne  Van  Dyk)  299 

Watson,  Justin.  The  Christian  Coalition:  Dreams  of  Restoration , Demands  for 

Recognition  (Peggy  L.  Shriver)  317 

Webb-Mitchell,  Brett.  Dancing  with  Disabilities:  Opening  the  Church  to  All  God's 

Children  (Rolf  A.  Jacobson)  231 

Wilbanks,  Dana  W.  Re-Creating  America:  The  Ethics  of  U.S.  Immigration  and 

Refiigee  Policy  in  a Christian  Perspective  (Roger  L.  Shinn)  92 

Witte,  John,  Jr.  From  Sacrament  to  Contract:  Marriage , Religion , and  Law  in  the 

Western  Tradition  (Bryan  D.  Spinks)  204 


New  in  the  Interpretation  series 


First  and  Second 
Thessalonians 

Beverly  Roberts  Gaventa 
Cloth  $22.00 

The  two  epistles  are  a study 
in  contrasts.  A brief  compari- 
son of  them  reveals  consider- 
able similarities  of  structure  and  language,  but 
differences  as  well.  The  most  important  concerns  of 
the  first  letter  all  but  disappear  in  the  second,  and 
minor  concerns  of  the  first  letter  increase  in  volume 
and  intensity  in  the  second. 

How  do  we  account  for  similarities  in  the  structure 
and  language  of  these  letters,  and  the  differences  in 
content  and  tone? 

Writing  separately  on  each  book,  Gaventa  discusses 
the  issues  central  to  each,  identifying  what  makes 
each  important  for  the  life  of  the  church  today,  as 
well  as  for  preachers  and  teachers. 


WESTMINSTER 

JOHN  KNOX  PRESS 


1-800-227-2872 

1 00  Witherspoon  Street 
Louisville,  KY  40202-1  396 
Visit  us  at:  www.pcusa.org/ppc 


Brian  K.  Blount 

Go  Preach! 

Mark's  Kingdom 
Message  and  the 
Black  Church  Today 

" Co  Preach!  seeks  to  build  bridges 
and  deftly  challenges  us  to  look  afresh 
at  the  Gospel  of  Mark's  kingdom  messages 
Professor  Blount  wants  us  to  see  this 
message  not  merely  in  terms  of  what 
it  meant  long  ago,  but  what  it  can  do 
for  social  transformation  today!" 

— Cain  Hope  Felder, 

Howard  University  School  of  Divinity 

Connecting  the  apocalyptic  message  of 
Mark's  Gospel  to  the  principles  and  programs  of  socio-cultural 
transformation  in  the  life  of  the  Black  church  today,  Blount  begins  > 
his  study  of  Mark  by  examining  the  social  significance  of  Jesus's 
proclamation  of  the  coming  Kingdom  of  God.  Through  Jesus,  God's 
future  power  broke  through  to  the  human  present.  This  experience 
of  the  Kingdom  empowered  the  disciples  to  "Go  preach"  the  Kingdom 
message  in  word  and  deed,  to  finish  the  story 
that  Mark's  narration  about  Jesus  began. 

"The  first  text  to  lay  bare  the  radical  significance 
of  Mark's  message  for  the  contemporary  African- 
American  church,  Go  Preach!  breaks  crucial 
new  ground  in  biblical  studies  ...  It  is  sure  to 
become  a touchstone  for  preachers  and  biblical 
scholars  seeking  to  become  Bible-centered  agents 
of  social  change." 

— Obery  M.  Hendricks,  Jr.,  Ph.D., 
Payne  Theological  Seminary 


Brian  K.  Blount 


_ Go 
PreachT 

Mark's  Kingdom  Message 
and  the 

Black  Church  Today 


280pp.  Index 
$25.00  Paperback 
ISBN  1-57075-171-4 


BOOKS 


Maryknoll,  New  York  10545 


Available  through  your  bookseller 
or  direct  with  MC/VISA  (UPS  additional) 

1-800-258-5838 


Spirituality  and 
Theology 

Essays  in  Honor  of 
Diogenes  Allen 
Eric  O.  Springsted,  editor 
Paper  $17.00 


This  collection 
honors  the  work  of 
Diogenes  Allen,  one 
of  the  leading  theologians  in 
the  United  States  during  this  century. 
Contributors,  from  the  fields  of  theology, 
spirituality,  and  ethics,  are:  Stanley  Hauerwas, 
David  B.  Burrell,  Brian  Hebblethwaite,  Edward 
Henderson,  Jeffrey  C.  Eaton,  Gerhard  Sauter, 
Daniel  L.  Migliore,  Elena  Malits,  Daniel  W.  Hardy, 
and  Springsted.  The  essays  demonstrate  how 
Allen's  work  remains  fresh,  invigorating,  and 
provocative  in  the  late  1990s.  Interdisciplinary  by 
design,  this  collection  makes  an  important  addition 
to  graduate  and  seminary  classes. 


Eric  O.  Springsted  is  a member  of  the  Center  of  Theological  Inquiry 
and  guest  professor  at  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  this  fall. 


WESTMINSTER 


1-800-227-2872 

1 00  Witherspoon  Street 


uTul  JOHN  KNOX  PRESS  Louis*,  ky  40202.1 396 


Visit  US  at:  www.pcusa.org/ppc 


Covenant  and 
Commitments 

Faith,  Family,  and 
Economic  Life 

Max  L.  Stackhouse 
Paper  $18.00 

In  this  recent  addition  to  The 


Family,  Religion,  and  Culture 


series.  Max  Stackhouse  offers  a fresh  vision  of  how 


the  family  may  best  reconstitute  the  household.  He 
challenges  libertarian  and  liberationist  arguments 
based  on  economic  ideologies  and  sociobiological 
theories  that  distort  the  nature  and  character  of 


love,  sexuality,  and  commitment.  Recognizing  the 
inadequacy  of  current  "family  values"  rhetoric,  he 
seeks  to  recover  a covenantal  ethic  for  the  family 
that  would  account  for  new  male-female,  parent- 
child,  production-consumption,  and  household- 
workplace  relationships. 


ii  ii  ii  ii  i 

min 


WESTMINSTER 

JOHN  KNOX  PRESS 


1-800-227-2872 

1 00  Witherspoon  Street 
Louisville,  KY  40202-1  396 
Visit  us  at:  www.pcusa.org/ppc 


Counseling 

Troubled  Youth 

Paper  $16.00 

Suicide.  Homicide. 

Eating  disorders.  Drugs 
and  alcohol.  Promiscuity. 

Academic  failure.  Today's 
youths  often  are 
overwhelmed  by  difficult  pasts  and  find  themselves 
lacking  in  hope  that  the  future  will  be  more 
meaningful.  Many  suffer  what  is  described  as 
disorders  of  the  self.  Robert  Dykstra  uses  case 
studies  of  four  such  young  people  from  varied 
backgrounds  to  teach  pastoral  caregivers  the 
theoretical  knowledge  and  practical  wisdom  to  offer 
youths  effective  ministry  on  the  journey  to  find  "self." 


Robert  C.  Dykstra 


i ii  li  ii  ii  i 

mm 


WESTMINSTER 

JOHN  KNOX  PRESS 


1-800-227-2872 

1 00  Witherspoon  Street 
Louisville,  KY  40202-1  396 
Visit  us  at:  www.pcusa.org/ppc 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


THE  FACULTY  1998-99 


V.  K.  M.  Adam 
Diogenes  Allen 
ames  F.  Armstrong 
Charles  L.  Bartow 
Irian  K.  Blount 
Donald  Capps 
ames  H.  Charlesworth 
illen  T.  Charry 
Stephen  D.  Crocco 
£enda  Creasy  Dean 
ames  C.  Deming 
MancyJ.  Duff 
Robert  C.  Dykstra 
Abigail  Rian  Evans 
Lichard  K.  Fenn 
ifasuo  Carl  Furuya’ 
Beverly  Roberts  Gaventa 
Ceddes  W.  Hanson 
Scott  H.  Hendrix 


Thomas  W.  Gillespie,  President 

Carol  Lakey  Hess 
Deborah  van  Deusen  Hunsinger 
G.  Robert  Jacks 
Donald  H.  Juel 
James  F.  Kay 
Jacqueline  E.  Lapslev 
Cleophus  J.  LaRue 
Sang  Hyun  Lee 
James  E.  Loder 
Eugene  L.  Lowryttt 
Ulrich  Mauser 
John  Mbiti* 

Bruce  L.  McCormack 
Elsie  Anne  McKee 
Kathleen  E.  McVey 
Daniel  L.  Migliore 
Patrick  D.  Miller 
James  H.  Moorhead 
J.  Randall  Nichols 

EMERITI /AE 


Dennis  T.  Olson 
Richard  R.  Osmer 
Peter  J.  Paris 
J.  J.  M.  Roberts 
Paul  E.  Rorem 
Charles  A.  Ryerson  III 

arine  Doob  Sakenfeld 
loon-Leong  Seow 

. SpringstedJt 

. Stackhouse 
John  W.  Stewart 
Mark  Taylor 
Martin  Tel 

Leonora  Tubbs  Tisdale 
J.  Wentzel  van  Huyssteen 
J.  Ross  Wagner 
Andrew  F.  Wallst 
Janet  L.  Weathers 


Bernhard  W.  Anderson 
Richard  S.  Armstrong 
W.  J.  Beeners 
[.  Christiaan  Beker 
William  Brower 
fane  Dempsey  Douglass 
Edward  A.  Dowey,  Jr. 
Elizabeth  G.  Edwards 


Karlfried  Froehlich 
Freda  A.  Gardner 
James  N.  Lapsley,  Jr. 
Donald  Macleod 
Conrad  H.  Massa 
Bruce  M.  Metzger 
Paul  W.  Meyer 
Samuel  Hugh  Moffett 


Alan  Neely 
M.  Richard  Shaull 
Cullen  I K Story 
Charles  C.  West 
E.  David  Willis 
Gibson  Winter 
D.  Campbell  Wyckoff 


‘Mackay  Professor,  first  semester 
**Mackay  Professor,  second  semester 
fGuest,  academic  year 
ftGuest,  first  semester 
ttfGuest,  second  semester 


rr 

TO 

2 

T3 

z 

£ 

n 

m 

H 

O 

"0 

z 

75 

n> 

z 

3 

m 

n> 

CL 

c 

■— 

— $ 
<T> 

CD 

73 

B3 

C/3 

CL 

m 

►< 

CA 

cr 

o 

" — 

oc 

Ul 

K) 

O 

oc 

c 

u> 

’ V 

o 

DO 

0 

X 

00 

N> 


2521  TB  511 

11-04-99  32180  XL  H 


mo 

030 

CD 


H-5 

CD 


D-J— 

acc* 

<r<z 


LLi 


<IH 

cdqcIt-hcm 

CD  CO  03  LTl 
CD  CO 
— I ! DC  CD 
CD  CD 
LLID-OD 
3DO*:  —3 

I — <TLL!Z 

31  CD  5— I DC 
CD  I— I Li- CD 


LLi  CDUJ 

uo:  cd 

Z 111  I— sc 

1 — 1 LL2  CO ! — * 

ca:c-CDc^ 

O-COO-Q. 


*T3 

m 

-o 

c 

z 

cd 

d r 

c/> 

O 

"i 

3 

ft: 

-D 

3 

ft: 

o 

Z 

-o 

CA 

ft: 

-n 

O 

o 

> 

rro 

. 102 

■o 

LA 

to 

*■0 

ft: 

o 

aa 

N> 

a.’ 

PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


012  01467  9585 


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY 


PERIODICALS